all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 274.75 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User manual I | Users Manual | 698.85 KiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 |
|
User manual II | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 |
|
User manual III | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | External Photos | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 274.75 KiB |
Compliance and Safety Manual Contents Contents 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement ..................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 European Community CE Certification DoC ........................................................................................... 1-2 2 Regulatory Compliance Information ................................................................................. 2-4 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards .......................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2 European Directives Compliance ............................................................................................................ 2-7 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance .................................................................................................................. 2-7 2.3.1 FCC Part 15................................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance .............................................................................................................. 2-8 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement ..................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement: ....................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.5 Japanese Compliance .............................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.5.1 VCCI ............................................................................................................................................ 2-9 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance ........................................................................................................................... 2-10 3 Safety Information ................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 General Requirements.................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Electricity Safety .................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 High Voltage.................................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2.2 Thunderstorm ................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.2.3 Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage ................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.5 Power Cable .................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.6 Fuse .............................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge .................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3 Inflammable Environment ...................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4 Battery ................................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.1 Storage Battery .............................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.2 Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.5 Laser ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.5.1 General Laser Information ............................................................................................................ 3-10 Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i Contents Compliance and Safety Manual 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 3-10 3.5.3 Handling Fibers ............................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.6 Working at Heights ................................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.6.1 Weight Lifting .............................................................................................................................. 3-11 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use ......................................................................................................... 3-12 3.7 Mechanical Safety ................................................................................................................................. 3-13 3.7.1 Drilling ........................................................................................................................................ 3-13 3.7.2 Sharp Objects ............................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.3 Handling Fans .............................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects ................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8 Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board ................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables ................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements................................................................................................................... 3-15 ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) Compliance and Safety Manual Figures Figures Figure 1-1 European community CE certification DoC................................................................................. 1-2 Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap ........................................................................................................ 3-7 Figure 3-2 Weight lifting ............................................................................................................................ 3-12 Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii Compliance and Safety Manual Tables Tables Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards .................................................................................................. 2-5 Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement About This Chapter This chapter provides the certification details for AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products. l European Community CE Certification Declaration of Conformity (DoC) Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Compliance and Safety Manual 1.1 European Community CE Certification DoC Figure 1-1 European community CE certification DoC 1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1-3 Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards Description The regulatory compliance standards on EMC, safety, NEBS, telecom, Laser Radiation, RF, health, and environmental protection. 2.2 European Directives Compliance The compliance with European directives, including RoHS compliance and device recycling guide. 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance 2.5 Japanese Compliance The USA regulatory compliance, including FCC part 15. The Japan regulatory compliance, including VCCI Class A.. 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance The CISPR 22 regulatory compliance. 2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the standards listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards Discipline EMC Safety Standards l CISPR22:2008 Class A l CISPR24:1997+A1:2001+A2:2002 l EN55022:2006+A1:2007 Class A l EN50024:1998+A1:2001+A2:2003 l ETSI EN 300 386 V1.5.1:2010 Class A l ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1:2008 l ETSI EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1:2009 l CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart B:2010 Class A l ICES 003:2004 Class A l AS/NZS CISPR22:2009 Class A l ANSI C63.4:2003 l CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC CISPER 22:02 l GB9254 Class A l VCCI V-3:2010 Class A l CNS 13438 Class A l IEC61000-3-2 l IEC61000-3-3 l EN61000-3-2 l EN61000-3-3 l ITU-T K.20 l ITU-T K.44 l ITU-T K.45 l IEC 60950-1:2005(2nd Edition) l IEC/EN41003 l EN 60950-12006+A11:2009 l UL 60950-1 l CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 l AS/NZS 60950.1 l BS EN 60950-1 l IS 13252 l GB4943 Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Discipline Laser safety Health Compliance and Safety Manual Standards l FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 l IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1, EN60825-2 l GB7247 l ICNIRP Guideline l 1999-519-EC l EN 50385 l OET Bulletin 65 l IEEE Std C95.1 l EN 60215 Environmental protection RoHS Grounding l ITU-T K.27 l ETSI EN 300 253 Note:
EMC: electromagnetic compatibility NEBS: Network Equipment Build Standard RF: radio frequency CISPR: International Special Committee on Radio Interference EN: European Standard ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute CFR: Code of Federal Regulations FCC: Federal Communication Commission IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission AS/NZS: Australian/New Zealand Standard VCCI: Voluntary Control Council for Interference CNS: Chinese National Standard UL: Underwriters Laboratories CSA: Canadian Standards Association BS: British Standard IS: Indian Standard GR: general requirement FDA: Food and Drug Administration BTS: base transceiver station GSM: Global System for Mobile communications WLAN: wireless local area network ICNIRP: International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection OET: Office of Engineering Technology IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers RoHS: restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances 2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2.2 European Directives Compliance AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the following European directives. l l l 89/336/EC (EMC) 2006/95/EC (low voltage) 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) Refer to Figure 1-1 for Huawei Declaration of Conformity. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/95/EC, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The device does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment. Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices. Contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. The main materials in the device are steel, plastics, copper, and electronic components. Most of the materials are recyclable. lists the main materials used in the device. Comply with the following rules for recycling at the end of life of the device. l Remove power first in the disassembly. l Remove and send batteryPCBfans and cables to special institution for disposal because it contains chemical substance. l Dispose of battery separately because it contains hazardous substance. l No hazardous substance is contained in the label printing ink and plastic paint, and no hazardous gas is emitted when the label printing ink and plastic paint is burning. l Dispose of the yellow chromate conversion coating screw separately because it contains Cr6+. Provide the plastic marking reference, such as ISO1043, and EN50419. l 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.3.1 FCC Part 15 AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
l l This device does not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense. 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Cet quipement est conforme l'exposition aux rayonnements IC limites tablies pour unenvironnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre le radiateur et votre corps. NoteRSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement and RSS-102 statement apply to models AR1220VW,AR1220W and AR1220W-S only. 2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) Compliance and Safety Manual 2.5 Japanese Compliance 2.5.1 VCCI 2 Regulatory Compliance Information AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with VCCI Class A by Information Technology Equipment (ITE). Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance Compliance and Safety Manual AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with CISPR 22 for Class A by the ITE. Class A ITE is a category of all other ITE that satisfies only the Class A ITE regulations, and not the Class B ITE regulations. Such equipment should not be restricted in its sale but the following warning shall be included in the instructions for use:
This is Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference;
therefore, the user is required to take appropriate measures. 2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3 Safety Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 3.1 Overview Description Safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. 3.2 Electricity Safety Information about the electricity safety. 3.3 Inflammable Environment Information about the inflammable environment safety. 3.4 Battery 3.5 Laser 3.6 Working at Heights 3.7 Mechanical Safety 3.8 Miscellaneous Information about the battery safety. Safety precautions on the Electromagnetic Field Exposure of the device and laser. Safety precautions to be taken before using the ladders or hoisting heavy objects. Safety precautions on drilling, on sharp objects, on handling fans, and on lifting heavy objects. Safety precautions on inserting and removing boards, on bundling signal cables, and cabling requirements. Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1 AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Safety Precautions This section describes the safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. l Before performing an operation, read the operation instructions and precautions to be taken, and follow them to prevent accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger items in other documents do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are only supplementary information. The installation and maintenance personnel need to understand the basic safety precautions to be taken. l When operating the device, obey the local safety regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are supplementary and shall be in compliance with the local safety regulations. l When operating the Huawei device, in addition to the precautions, follow the specific safety instructions given by Huawei. The installation and maintenance personnel must receive training in safety precautions. Only qualified personnel can install or maintain the device. l 3.1.2 General Requirements To minimize the technically residual risk, it is imperative to obey the following rules. Read all the instructions before operation. Installation The device (or system) must be installed or used in the access restricted location. l l Be care the hot surface when the device is operating. When touching the surface or operating the handle of the device by hands, wear gloves to protect your hands from scalding. l Before operation, the device must be fixed securely on the floor or to other reliable objects, such as the walls and the mounting racks. l When installing the unit, always make the ground connection first and disconnect it at the end. l Do not block the ventilation while the device is running. Keep a minimum distance of 5 cm from the ventilation to the walls or the other objects that block the ventilation. Tighten the thumbscrews by using a tool after both initial installation and subsequent access to the panel. l Ground l Do not damage the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of well installed ground conductor. Conduct the appropriate electrical inspection. The device (or system) must be connected permanently to the protection ground before an operation. The cross sectional area of protective ground conductor shall be at least 1.0 mm. l 3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Power Supply l l l l l l l For AC supplied model: The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. For AC supplied model: The device applies to TN, TT power systems. For DC supplied model: Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be provided to isolate DC source from the AC mains supply. Prepared conductors are connected to the terminal block, and only appropriate AWG/Type of wire is secured in the listed lug terminals. This device relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 240 VAC, 20 A for AC supplied model or 80 VDC, 10 A for DC supplied model is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors). For DC supplied model, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring. For AC supplied model: The plug-socket combination must be accessible at all times because it serves as the main disconnect device. l Because the device has several power supplies, disconnect all of them to switch off the device. The AC power supply has double pole/neutral fusing. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. l l Human Safety Operator l Do not operate the device or cables at lightning strikes. l To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits. l Do not look directly into the optical port to prevent the laser radiation from injuring your eyes. l Do not wear jewelry or watches when you operate the device. l Only qualified and skilled personnel must install, configure, and disassemble the device. l Only the personnel authorized must operate the device. l Any replacement or change to the device or parts of the device (including the software) must be done by qualified or authorized personnel of Huawei. l Any fault or error that might cause safety problems must be reported immediately to the person in charge. l Only qualified personnel must remove or disable the safety facilities, or to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Ensure that the instructions provided in this document are followed completely. The document also provides guidelines in selecting the measuring and testing device. Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3 3 Safety Information 3.2 Electricity Safety 3.2.1 High Voltage AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual The high voltage power supply offers power for the device operation. Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal danger. l During the installation of the AC power supply facility, follow the local safety regulations. The personnel who install the AC facility must be qualified to perform high voltage and AC operations. l Do not wear conductive articles, such as watches, hand chains, bracelets and rings during the operation. l When water is found in the rack or the rack is damp, switch off the power supply immediately. l When the operation is performed in a damp environment, make sure that the device is dry. Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire and electric shock. Therefore, you must obey the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables. Only qualified personnel must perform high voltage and AC operations. 3.2.2 Thunderstorm High voltage and AC operations, or operations on a steel tower and a mast are prohibited during thunderstorm. During thunderstorm, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may damage the electronic parts. To prevent damage to the device during lightning, ground the device properly. 3.2.3 Tools 3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Suggestion: Dedicated tools must be used during high voltage and AC operations. Avoid using ordinary tools. 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage Ground the device before powering on the device. Otherwise, the personnel and device are in danger. If the "high electrical leakage" flag is stuck to the power terminal of the device, you must ground the device before powering it on. 3.2.5 Power Cable Installation and removal of live line are prohibited. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch. l Before connecting the power cable, confirm that the power cable and label comply with the requirements of the actual installation. l For the DC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. l For AC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. l Use the type H03VV-F or light PVC sheathed flexible cord based on IEC 60227. 3.2.6 Fuse Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5 3 Safety Information AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual If a fuse is to be replaced, the new fuse shall be of the same type and specifications. 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the circuit board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). Friction between shoes and the ground In the following situations, the human body will generate a static electromagnetic field:
l Human body moving l Clothes friction l l Holding ordinary plastic in hand The static electromagnetic field will remain within the human body for a long time. Before touching the device, hand-operating parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear a grounded electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap. It can prevent the sensitive components from damage by the static electricity in the human body. 3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual Figure 3-1 shows the wearing of an ESD wrist strap. Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 3 Safety Information 3.3 Inflammable Environment Operating the electrical device in inflammable environment can be fatal. Do not place the device in the environment that has inflammable and explosive air or fog. Do not perform any operation in this environment. 3.4 Battery 3.4.1 Storage Battery Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7 3 Safety Information AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual Before handling the battery, read carefully the safety precautions to be taken for battery handling and connections. Non-standard operation on batteries may result in danger. During operation:
l l Protect the battery against short-circuit Prevent electrolyte overflow and leakage Electrolyte overflow may damage the device. It will corrode the metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the device and cause short-circuit of the circuit boards. General Operations Before installing and maintaining the battery, note the following:
l Do not wear metal articles such as wristwatch, hand chain, bracelet and ring. l Use special-purpose insulation tools. l l Wear rubber gloves and an apron in the case of electrolyte overflow. l Always keep the electrode front upright when handling the battery. Do not place the Take care to protect you eyes when operating the device. battery upside down or tilt it. Short-Circuit Battery short-circuit may cause physical injury. Though voltage of a general battery is low, high transient current generated by short-circuit will release a large amount of power. There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Keep away metal objects, which may cause battery short-circuit, from batteries. If they have to be used, first disconnect the batteries in use before performing any other operations. 3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual Harmful Gas 3 Safety Information l Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries, because the gas emitted from the battery may result in fire or device corrosion. l Lay the battery horizontally and fix it properly. l The battery in use will emit flammable gas. Therefore, put the battery in a place with good ventilation, and take fire precautions. High Temperature High temperature may result in distortion, damage and electrolyte overflow of the battery. When the temperature of the battery exceeds 60 C, check whether there is acid liquid overflow. If acid liquid overflow occurs, handle the acid liquid immediately. Acid Liquid In case of acid liquid overflow, absorb and neutralize the liquid immediately. When moving or removing a leaky battery, note the possible damage caused by the acid liquid. Once the acid liquid spill is found, use the following materials to absorb and neutralize it. l l Sodium bicarbonate (baking soda): NaHCO3 Sodium carbonate (soda): Na2CO3 The use of antacids must follow the guide provided by the battery supplier. 3.4.2 Lithium Battery Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9 3 Safety Information AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual l There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. l Dispose the used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. l Do not dispose of lithium battery in fire. 3.5 Laser The laser hazard level of this device is Class 1. When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look at the optical fiber outlet directly with unaided eyes. 3.5.1 General Laser Information Laser transceivers or transmitters are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The wavelength of the laser is between 780 nm and 1600 nm. Because the laser is transmitted through the optical fiber, it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters the eye, the retina may be damaged. Laser of wavelengths used in telecommunications can cause thermal damage to the retina. Lasers used in lightwave systems have a larger beam divergence, typically 10 to 20 degrees. Viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will normally not cause eye injury. However, damage may occur if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to view the energized fiber end. In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. Additional safety is achieved by an automatic laser shut-down (ALS) of the system. The ALS, however, can be applied for bi-directional transmission only. If the receiver side does not detect the laser from the transmission side, it will give the transmission side a signal. Upon receiving the signal, the ALS will shut down the laser emission within 100 ms. 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines Read the following guidelines to avoid laser radiation:
l Read the instructions before installing, operating and maintaining the device. Ignoring the instructions can cause exposure to dangerous laser radiation. l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. 3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information l All the operation shall be performed by personnel who have completed the approved training courses. l Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission system, make sure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. l Do not look at the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off or not. l Use an optical power meter to check and ensure that the optical source is switched off by measuring the optical power. l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber. 3.5.3 Handling Fibers Read the instructions before handling fibers. l Cutting and splicing fibers must be performed by the trained personnel only. l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, use protecting caps to protect all the optical connectors. 3.6 Working at Heights When working at heights, be careful to prevent objects from falling. When working at heights, shall comply with the following requirements. l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained. The operating machines and tools shall be carried and handled safely to avoid falling. Safety protection measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, shall be taken. In cold regions, wear worm clothes when performing high-altitude operation. l l All lifting appliances must be thoroughly checked before the work is started. l 3.6.1 Weight Lifting Do not access the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight. Ensure the operators have completed the related training and are qualified. l l Check the weight lifting tools and confirm that the tools are in good condition. Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11 3 Safety Information AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual l Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object or the wall. l Use a concise command to avoid incorrect operation. l Ensure the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lift.
(see Figure 3-2). Figure 3-2 Weight lifting Maximum 90 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use Checking the Ladder Before using the ladder, first check if the ladder is in good condition. Make sure that you know the maximum weight that the ladder can support; overweight on the ladder is strictly prohibited. 3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual Placing the Ladder 3 Safety Information Slant angle is suggested to be 75 degrees. The slant can be measured with the angle square or with arms. When using a ladder, place the wider end of the ladder on the ground. Otherwise, take protective measures on the base part of the ladder to avoid skidding. Place the ladder on stable ground. Climbing the Ladder When climbing the ladder, note the following. l l Ensure the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge. To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, hold your balance on the ladder before any operation. l Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder. l If you are about to climb to the top, the length of the ladder shall be one meter higher than the eave. 3.7 Mechanical Safety 3.7.1 Drilling Drilling on the rack without permission is strictly prohibited. Drilling that does not satisfy the requirements concerned may damage the wires and cables inside the rack. If the metal shavings from the drilling fall into the rack, it may result in short circuit of the circuit boards. l Before drilling a hole on the rack, wear insulation gloves, and remove the cables inside the rack. l During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are well protected. The hot shavings may injury to your eyes. Ensure that the metal shavings do not get into the rack. l l Non-standard drilling may damage the electromagnetic shielding performance of the rack. l After drilling, clean the metal shavings in time. 3.7.2 Sharp Objects Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13 3 Safety Information AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual When carrying the device by hand, wear protection gloves to avoid injury by sharp objects. 3.7.3 Handling Fans Ensure the following:
l When replacing a component, place the component, screw, and tool at a safe place to prevent them from falling into the running fan. l When replacing the ambient equipment around the fan, do not place the finger or board into the running fan until the fan is switched off and stops running. 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects When lifting heavy objects, do not stand or walk under the arm or the lifted object. 3.8 Miscellaneous 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board To insert or remove a board, abide by the following requirements:
When inserting a board, handle it gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l l Insert the board along the slot guide. The two sides of one board should not contact another board to avoid short-circuit or scratch. l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuit, components, connectors, or connection slots. 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables 3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2009-08-24) AR 3200 Series Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information l Bundle the signal cables separately from the strong current cables or high voltage cables. l Maintain a minimum space of 150 mm between adjacent ties. 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements At a very low temperature, movement of the cable may damage the plastic skin of the cable. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. l If cables are stored in the place below 0C, move the cables into a place at a room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. l Move the cables with care, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly from the vehicle. Issue (2009-08-24) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15
1 2 | User manual I | Users Manual | 698.85 KiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Compliance and Safety Manual Issue Date 03 2012-4-27 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
http://www.huawei.com Email:
support@huawei.com Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i Compliance and Safety Manual Contents About This Document Intended Audience This document describes Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and other safety standards compliance and information about the AR G3 series enterprise routers. This document provides the general safety guidelines for handling, installing or operating the AR G3 series enterprise routers. This document is intended for:
Maintenance engineers Technical support engineers Installation engineers Network planning engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii Contents Change History Compliance and Safety Manual Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-06-25) Initial commercial release. Changes in Issue 02 (2011-10-15) Two warning messages are added in the document for the wireless products. Changes in Issue 03 (2011-12-30) The CE certificates of AR1200, AR2200, and AR3200 are updated. iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual Contents Contents 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 European Community CE Certification ........................................................................................................ 1-2 2 Regulatory Compliance Information ..................................................................................... 2-5 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards ................................................................................................................ 2-6 2.2 European Directives Compliance .................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance ........................................................................................................................ 2-8 2.3.1 FCC Part 15.......................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance .................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement ........................................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement ............................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.5 Japanese Compliance .................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.5.1 VCCI .................................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 2-10 3 Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.1.2 General Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Electricity Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 High Voltage ........................................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.2.2 Thunderstorm ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.3 Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage ....................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.5 Power Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.6 Fuse ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge......................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 Inflammable Environment ............................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4 Battery ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.1 Storage Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.2 Lithium Battery .................................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.5 Laser .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.5.1 General Laser Information ................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................................................... 3-10 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v Contents Compliance and Safety Manual 3.5.3 Handling Fibers .................................................................................................................................. 3-10 3.6 Working at Heights ...................................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.1 Weight Lifting .................................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use .............................................................................................................. 3-12 3.7 Mechanical Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.1 Drilling ............................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.2 Sharp Objects ..................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.3 Handling Fans .................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.8 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board ........................................................................................................ 3-14 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables ...................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.9 3G antenna .................................................................................................................................................. 3-15 4 Sicherheitsinformationen ....................................................................................................... 4-16 4.1 berblick ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.1.1 Sicherheitsmanahmen ...................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.1.2 Allgemeine Anforderungen ................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit .................................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.2.1 Hochspannung .................................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.2.2 Gewitter ............................................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.2.3 Werkzeuge .......................................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.2.4 Hoher Kriechstrom ............................................................................................................................. 4-20 4.2.5 Zuleitung ............................................................................................................................................ 4-20 4.2.6 Sicherung ........................................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.2.7 Elektrostatische Entladung ................................................................................................................. 4-21 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung ....................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.4 Batterie ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-23 4.4.1 Speicherbatterie .................................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.4.2 Lithium-Batterie ................................................................................................................................. 4-25 4.5 Laser ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-25 4.5.1 Allgemeine Informationen zum Laser ................................................................................................ 4-25 4.5.2 Sicherheitsrichtlinien fr Laser .......................................................................................................... 4-26 4.5.3 Umgang mit Fasern ............................................................................................................................ 4-26 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen ........................................................................................................................... 4-27 4.6.1 Heben von groen Gewichten ............................................................................................................ 4-27 4.6.2 Sicherheitsleitfaden zur Verwendung von Leitern ............................................................................. 4-28 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit ............................................................................................................................... 4-29 4.7.1 Bohren ................................................................................................................................................ 4-29 4.7.2 Scharfkantige Gegenstnde ................................................................................................................ 4-29 4.7.3 Umgang mit Ventilatoren ................................................................................................................... 4-29 vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual Contents 4.7.4 Heben schwerer Gegenstnde ............................................................................................................ 4-30 4.8 Verschiedenes .............................................................................................................................................. 4-30 4.8.1 Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten ........................................................................................ 4-30 4.8.2 Bndeln von Signalleitungen ............................................................................................................. 4-30 4.8.3 Verkabelungsanforderungen ............................................................................................................... 4-31 4.9 3G Antenne.................................................................................................................................................. 4-31 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii Compliance and Safety Manual Figures Figures Figure 1-1 European community CE certification DoC ..................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap .............................................................................................................. 3-6 Figure 3-2 Weight lifting .................................................................................................................................. 3-12 Figure 4-1 Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes ........................................................................................................ 4-22 Figure 4-2 Heben von groen Gewichten ......................................................................................................... 4-28 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix Compliance and Safety Manual Tables Tables Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards ....................................................................................................... 2-6 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement About This Chapter This chapter provides the certification details for AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products. European Community CE Certification Declaration of Conformity (DoC) Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Compliance and Safety Manual 1.1 European Community CE Certification Figure 1-1 European community CE certification of AR1200 1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Figure 1-2 European community CE certification of AR2200 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Figure 1-3 European community CE certification of AR3260 Compliance and Safety Manual 1-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2 Regulatory Compliance Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title Description 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards The regulatory compliance standards on EMC, safety, NEBS, telecom, Laser Radiation, RF, health, and environmental protection. 2.2 European Directives Compliance The compliance with European directives, including RoHS compliance and device recycling guide. 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.5 Japanese Compliance The USA regulatory compliance, including FCC part 15. The Japan regulatory compliance, including VCCI Class A.. 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance The CISPR 22 regulatory compliance. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the standards listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards Discipline Standards EMC Safety CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A CNS 13438 Class A IEC61000-3-2 IEC61000-3-3 EN61000-3-2 EN61000-3-3 ITU-T K.20 ITU-T K.44 ITU-T K.45 IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950.1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1, EN60825-2 GB7247 2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Discipline Standards Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 EN 60215 Environmental protection RoHS Grounding ITU-T K.27 ETSI EN 300 253 Note:
EMC: electromagnetic compatibility NEBS: Network Equipment Build Standard RF: radio frequency CISPR: International Special Committee on Radio Interference EN: European Standard ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute CFR: Code of Federal Regulations FCC: Federal Communication Commission IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission AS/NZS: Australian/New Zealand Standard VCCI: Voluntary Control Council for Interference CNS: Chinese National Standard UL: Underwriters Laboratories CSA: Canadian Standards Association BS: British Standard IS: Indian Standard GR: general requirement FDA: Food and Drug Administration BTS: base transceiver station GSM: Global System for Mobile communications WLAN: wireless local area network ICNIRP: International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection OET: Office of Engineering Technology IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers RoHS: restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.2 European Directives Compliance AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the following European directives. 89/336/EC (EMC) 2006/95/EC (low voltage) 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) Refer to Figure 1-1 for Huawei Declaration of Conformity. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/95/EC, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The device does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment. Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices. Contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. The main materials in the device are steel, plastics, copper, and electronic components. Most of the materials are recyclable. Comply with the following rules for recycling at the end of life of the device. Remove power first in the disassembly. Remove and send batteryPCBfans and cables to special institution for disposal because it contains chemical substance. Dispose of battery separately because it contains hazardous substance. No hazardous substance is contained in the label printing ink and plastic paint, and no hazardous gas is emitted when the label printing ink and plastic paint is burning. Dispose of the yellow chromate conversion coating screw separately because it contains Cr6+. Provide the plastic marking reference, such as ISO1043, and EN50419. 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.3.1 FCC Part 15 AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device does not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense. 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9 WARNING 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.5 Japanese Compliance 2.5.1 VCCI AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with VCCI Class A by Information Technology Equipment (ITE). 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with CISPR 22 for Class A by the ITE. Class A ITE is a category of all other ITE that satisfies only the Class A ITE regulations, and not the Class B ITE regulations. Such equipment should not be restricted in its sale but the following warning shall be included in the instructions for use:
This is Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference;
therefore, the user is required to take appropriate measures. 2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3 Safety Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 3.1 Overview Description Safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. 3.2 Electricity Safety Information about the electricity safety. 3.3 Inflammable Environment Information about the inflammable environment safety. 3.4 Battery 3.5 Laser Information about the battery safety. Safety precautions on the Electromagnetic Field Exposure of the device and laser. 3.6 Working at Heights Safety precautions to be taken before using the ladders or hoisting heavy objects. 3.7 Mechanical Safety Safety precautions on drilling, on sharp objects, on handling fans, and on lifting heavy objects. 3.8 Miscellaneous Safety precautions on inserting and removing boards, on bundling signal cables, and cabling requirements. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1 3 Safety Information 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Safety Precautions Compliance and Safety Manual This section describes the safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. Before performing an operation, read the operation instructions and precautions to be taken, and follow them to prevent accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger items in other documents do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are only supplementary information. The installation and maintenance personnel need to understand the basic safety precautions to be taken. When operating the device, obey the local safety regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are supplementary and shall be in compliance with the local safety regulations. When operating the Huawei device, in addition to the precautions, follow the specific safety instructions given by Huawei. The installation and maintenance personnel must receive training in safety precautions. Only qualified personnel can install or maintain the device. 3.1.2 General Requirements To minimize the technically residual risk, it is imperative to obey the following rules. Read all the instructions before operation. Installation Ground The device (or system) must be installed or used in the access restricted location. Be care the hot surface when the device is operating. When touching the surface or operating the handle of the device by hands, wear gloves to protect your hands from scalding. Before operation, the device must be fixed securely on the floor or to other reliable objects, such as the walls and the mounting racks. When installing the unit, always make the ground connection first and disconnect it at the end. Do not block the ventilation while the device is running. Keep a minimum distance of 5 cm from the ventilation to the walls or the other objects that block the ventilation. Tighten the thumbscrews by using a tool after both initial installation and subsequent access to the panel. Do not damage the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of well installed ground conductor. Conduct the appropriate electrical inspection. The device (or system) must be connected permanently to the protection ground before an operation. The cross sectional area of protective ground conductor shall be at least 1.0 mm. 3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Power Supply For AC supplied model: The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. For AC supplied model: The device applies to TN, TT power systems. Prepared conductors are connected to the terminal block, and only appropriate AWG/Type of wire is secured in the listed lug terminals. This device relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 240 VAC, 20 A for AC supplied model or 80 VDC, 10 A for DC supplied model is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors). For AC supplied model: The plug-socket combination must be accessible at all times because it serves as the main disconnect device. Because the device has several power supplies, disconnect all of them to switch off the device. The AC power supply has double pole/neutral fusing. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Human Safety Do not operate the device or cables at lightning strikes. To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits. Do not look directly into the optical port to prevent the laser radiation from injuring your eyes. Do not wear jewelry or watches when you operate the device. Operator Only qualified and skilled personnel must install, configure, and disassemble the device. Only the personnel authorized must operate the device. Any replacement or change to the device or parts of the device (including the software) must be done by qualified or authorized personnel of Huawei. Any fault or error that might cause safety problems must be reported immediately to the person in charge. Only qualified personnel must remove or disable the safety facilities, or to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Ensure that the instructions provided in this document are followed completely. The document also provides guidelines in selecting the measuring and testing device. 3.2 Electricity Safety 3.2.1 High Voltage Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual The high voltage power supply offers power for the device operation. Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal danger. During the installation of the AC power supply facility, follow the local safety regulations. The personnel who install the AC facility must be qualified to perform high voltage and AC operations. Do not wear conductive articles, such as watches, hand chains, bracelets and rings during the operation. When water is found in the rack or the rack is damp, switch off the power supply immediately. When the operation is performed in a damp environment, make sure that the device is dry. Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire and electric shock. Therefore, you must obey the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables. Only qualified personnel must perform high voltage and AC operations. 3.2.2 Thunderstorm High voltage and AC operations, or operations on a steel tower and a mast are prohibited during thunderstorm. During thunderstorm, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may damage the electronic parts. To prevent damage to the device during lightning, ground the device properly. 3.2.3 Tools Suggestion: Dedicated tools must be used during high voltage and AC operations. Avoid using ordinary tools. 3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) DANGERWARNINGDANGERWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage 3 Safety Information Ground the device before powering on the device. Otherwise, the personnel and device are in danger. If the "high electrical leakage" flag is stuck to the power terminal of the device, you must ground the device before powering it on. 3.2.5 Power Cable Installation and removal of live line are prohibited. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch. Before connecting the power cable, confirm that the power cable and label comply with the requirements of the actual installation. For the DC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. For AC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. Use the type H03VV-F or light PVC sheathed flexible cord based on IEC 60227. 3.2.6 Fuse If a fuse is to be replaced, the new fuse shall be of the same type and specifications. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5 WARNINGWARNINGCAUTIONWARNING 3 Safety Information 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge Compliance and Safety Manual The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the circuit board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). In the following situations, the human body will generate a static electromagnetic field:
Human body moving Clothes friction Friction between shoes and the ground Holding ordinary plastic in hand The static electromagnetic field will remain within the human body for a long time. Before touching the device, hand-operating parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear a grounded electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap. It can prevent the sensitive components from damage by the static electricity in the human body. Figure 3-1 shows the wearing of an ESD wrist strap. Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) CAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3.3 Inflammable Environment Operating the electrical device in inflammable environment can be fatal. Do not place the device in the environment that has inflammable and explosive air or fog. Do not perform any operation in this environment. 3.4 Battery 3.4.1 Storage Battery Before handling the battery, read carefully the safety precautions to be taken for battery handling and connections. Non-standard operation on batteries may result in danger. During operation:
Protect the battery against short-circuit Prevent electrolyte overflow and leakage Electrolyte overflow may damage the device. It will corrode the metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the device and cause short-circuit of the circuit boards. General Operations Before installing and maintaining the battery, note the following:
Do not wear metal articles such as wristwatch, hand chain, bracelet and ring. Use special-purpose insulation tools. Take care to protect you eyes when operating the device. Wear rubber gloves and an apron in the case of electrolyte overflow. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7 DANGERDANGERCAUTION 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual Always keep the electrode front upright when handling the battery. Do not place the battery upside down or tilt it. Short-Circuit Battery short-circuit may cause physical injury. Though voltage of a general battery is low, high transient current generated by short-circuit will release a large amount of power. There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Keep away metal objects, which may cause battery short-circuit, from batteries. If they have to be used, first disconnect the batteries in use before performing any other operations. Harmful Gas Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries, because the gas emitted from the battery may result in fire or device corrosion. Lay the battery horizontally and fix it properly. The battery in use will emit flammable gas. Therefore, put the battery in a place with good ventilation, and take fire precautions. High Temperature High temperature may result in distortion, damage and electrolyte overflow of the battery. When the temperature of the battery exceeds 60C, check whether there is acid liquid overflow. If acid liquid overflow occurs, handle the acid liquid immediately. 3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNINGCAUTIONCAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual Acid Liquid 3 Safety Information In case of acid liquid overflow, absorb and neutralize the liquid immediately. When moving or removing a leaky battery, note the possible damage caused by the acid liquid. Once the acid liquid spill is found, use the following materials to absorb and neutralize it. Sodium bicarbonate (baking soda): NaHCO3 Sodium carbonate (soda): Na2CO3 The use of antacids must follow the guide provided by the battery supplier. 3.4.2 Lithium Battery There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose the used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Do not dispose of lithium battery in fire. 3.5 Laser The laser hazard level of this device is Class 1. When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look at the optical fiber outlet directly with unaided eyes. 3.5.1 General Laser Information Laser transceivers or transmitters are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The wavelength of the laser is between 780 nm and 1600 nm. Because the laser is transmitted through the optical fiber, it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters the eye, the retina may be damaged. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9 CAUTIONWARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual Laser of wavelengths used in telecommunications can cause thermal damage to the retina. Lasers used in lightwave systems have a larger beam divergence, typically 10 to 20 degrees. Viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will normally not cause eye injury. However, damage may occur if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to view the energized fiber end. In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. Additional safety is achieved by an automatic laser shut-down (ALS) of the system. The ALS, however, can be applied for bi-directional transmission only. If the receiver side does not detect the laser from the transmission side, it will give the transmission side a signal. Upon receiving the signal, the ALS will shut down the laser emission within 100 ms. 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines Read the following guidelines to avoid laser radiation:
Read the instructions before installing, operating and maintaining the device. Ignoring the instructions can cause exposure to dangerous laser radiation. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. All the operation shall be performed by personnel who have completed the approved training courses. Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission system, make sure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not look at the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off or not. Use an optical power meter to check and ensure that the optical source is switched off by measuring the optical power. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber. 3.5.3 Handling Fibers Read the instructions before handling fibers. Cutting and splicing fibers must be performed by the trained personnel only. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, use protecting caps to protect all the optical connectors. 3.6 Working at Heights 3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information When working at heights, be careful to prevent objects from falling. When working at heights, shall comply with the following requirements. The personnel who work at heights must be trained. The operating machines and tools shall be carried and handled safely to avoid falling. Safety protection measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, shall be taken. In cold regions, wear worm clothes when performing high-altitude operation. All lifting appliances must be thoroughly checked before the work is started. 3.6.1 Weight Lifting Do not access the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight. Ensure the operators have completed the related training and are qualified. Check the weight lifting tools and confirm that the tools are in good condition. Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object or the wall. Use a concise command to avoid incorrect operation. Ensure the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lift.
(see Figure 3-2). Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11 WARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Figure 3-2 Weight lifting Compliance and Safety Manual 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use Checking the Ladder Before using the ladder, first check if the ladder is in good condition. Make sure that you know the maximum weight that the ladder can support; overweight on the ladder is strictly prohibited. Placing the Ladder Slant angle is suggested to be 75 degrees. The slant can be measured with the angle square or with arms. When using a ladder, place the wider end of the ladder on the ground. Otherwise, take protective measures on the base part of the ladder to avoid skidding. Place the ladder on stable ground. 3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Maximum 90 Compliance and Safety Manual Climbing the Ladder 3 Safety Information When climbing the ladder, note the following. Ensure the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge. To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, hold your balance on the ladder before any operation. Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder. If you are about to climb to the top, the length of the ladder shall be one meter higher than the eave. 3.7 Mechanical Safety 3.7.1 Drilling Drilling on the rack without permission is strictly prohibited. Drilling that does not satisfy the requirements concerned may damage the wires and cables inside the rack. If the metal shavings from the drilling fall into the rack, it may result in short circuit of the circuit boards. Before drilling a hole on the rack, wear insulation gloves, and remove the cables inside the rack. During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are well protected. The hot shavings may injury to your eyes. Ensure that the metal shavings do not get into the rack. Non-standard drilling may damage the electromagnetic shielding performance of the rack. After drilling, clean the metal shavings in time. 3.7.2 Sharp Objects When carrying the device by hand, wear protection gloves to avoid injury by sharp objects. 3.7.3 Handling Fans Ensure the following:
When replacing a component, place the component, screw, and tool at a safe place to prevent them from falling into the running fan. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13 WARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual When replacing the ambient equipment around the fan, do not place the finger or board into the running fan until the fan is switched off and stops running. 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects When lifting heavy objects, do not stand or walk under the arm or the lifted object. 3.8 Miscellaneous 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board To insert or remove a board, abide by the following requirements:
When inserting a board, handle it gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. Insert the board along the slot guide. The two sides of one board should not contact another board to avoid short-circuit or scratch. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuit, components, connectors, or connection slots. 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables Bundle the signal cables separately from the strong current cables or high voltage cables. Maintain a minimum space of 150 mm between adjacent ties. 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements At a very low temperature, movement of the cable may damage the plastic skin of the cable. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If cables are stored in the place below 0C, move the cables into a place at a room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. 3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNINGCAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Move the cables with care, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly from the vehicle. 3.9 3G antenna The product uses standard 3G antenna. Only qualified personnel can install and maintain the antennas. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15 CAUTION 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen ber dieses Kapitel In der folgenden Tabelle ist der Inhalt dieses Kapitels aufgefhrt. Titel 4.1 berblick Beschreibung Sicherheitsvorkehrungen, die vor der Installation und Wartung des Huawei-Gerts ergriffen werden mssen. 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit Informationen ber die elektrische Sicherheit. 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung Informationen ber die Sicherheit feuergefhrlicher Umgebungen. 4.4 Batterie 4.5 Laser 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit 4.8 Verschiedenes Informationen ber die Sicherheit der Batterie. Sicherheitsmanahmen, wenn das Gert und der Laser elektromagnetischen Feldern ausgesetzt sind. Sicherheitsmanahmen, die vor Verwendung von Leitern oder vor dem Heben schwerer Gegenstnde ergriffen werden mssen. Sicherheitsmanahmen beim Bohren, bei scharfkantigen Gegenstnden, beim Umgang mit Lftern und beim Heben schwerer Gegenstnde. Sicherheitsmanahmen beim Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten, beim Bndeln von Signalleitungen sowie Verkabelungsanforderungen. 4-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.1 berblick 4.1.1 Sicherheitsmanahmen Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt die Sicherheitsvorkehrungen, die vor der Installation und Wartung des Huawei-Gerts ergriffen werden mssen. Lesen Sie vor der Durchfhrung von Arbeiten die Bedienungsanleitung und die zu ergreifenden Vorsichtsmanahmen durch und befolgen Sie sie, um Unflle zu verhindern. Die in anderen Dokumenten aufgefhrten Symbole fr Achtung, Warnung und Gefahr beinhalten nicht alle zu beachtenden Sicherheitsvorschriften. Sie dienen nur als Zusatzinformationen. Das Installations- und Wartungspersonal muss die grundlegenden Sicherheitsmanahmen kennen, die ergriffen werden mssen. Beachten Sie beim Betrieb des Gerts die rtlichen Sicherheitsvorschriften. Die in diesen Dokumenten angegebenen Sicherheitsmanahmen dienen nur als Ergnzung und mssen den rtlichen Sicherheitsvorschriften entsprechen. Befolgen Sie beim Betrieb des Huawei-Gerts neben den Vorsichtsmanahmen auch die von Huawei angegebenen spezifischen Sicherheitsanweisungen. Das Installations- und Wartungspersonal muss in den Sicherheitsmanahmen geschult werden. Nur qualifiziertes Fachpersonal darf das Gert installieren oder warten. 4.1.2 Allgemeine Anforderungen Um das technische Restrisiko zu minimieren, mssen die folgenden Regeln befolgt werden. Lesen Sie alle Anweisungen sorgfltig durch, bevor Sie mit dem Arbeiten beginnen. Aufstellen Das Gert (oder das System) darf nur an Orten mit beschrnktem Zugang aufgestellt oder benutzt werden. Seien Sie vorsichtig, da die Oberflche des Gerts whrend des Betriebs hei wird. Wenn Sie die Oberflche mit den Hnden berhren oder den Griff des Gerts bettigen, sollten Sie zum Schutz Handschuhe tragen. Vor dem Betrieb muss das Gert sicher auf dem Boden oder an anderen zuverlssigen Gegenstnden befestigt sein, zum Beispiel an Wnden oder Montagegestellen. Beim Aufstellen der Einheit ist zuerst der Erdleiter anzuschlieen. Beim Trennen ist er als letzter zu entfernen. Decken Sie Lftungsffnungen whrend des Betriebes nicht ab. Sorgen Sie fr einen Abstand der Belftungsffnungen von mindestens 5 cm von Wnden oder anderen Gegenstnden, die die Belftung blockieren. Flgelmuttern und -schrauben sind nach der Erstinstallation und nach Wiederanbringung von Abdeckungen mit Hilfe von Werkzeug festzuziehen. Erdung Beschdigen Sie den Erdleiter nicht und betreiben Sie das Gert niemals ohne Erdung. Nehmen Sie Kontakt mit einem prfenden Elektriker auf. Das Gert (oder das System) muss vor der Inbetriebnahme permanent geerdet werden. Der Querschnitt des Schutzleiters muss mindestens 1,0 mm betragen. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-17 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Energieversorgung Compliance and Safety Manual Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Die Steckdose muss sich in der Nhe des Gerts befinden und leicht zugnglich sein. Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Das Gert arbeitet mit einem TN oder TT-Stromversorgungssystem. Vorbereitete Leiter werden an den Klemmenblock angeschlossen und nur die entsprechende AWG/Kabelart wird mit den Kabelschuhen gesichert. Dieses Gert bentigt eine Sicherung vor Kurzschluss (berstrom) in der Gebudeinstallation. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Sicherungswerte auf allen Phasenleitern
(alle stromfhrenden Leiter) nicht grer als 240 VAC, 20 A bei den mit Wechselstrom betriebenen Modellen sowie 80 VDC, 10 A bei den mit Gleichstrom betriebenen Modellen sind. Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Die Stecker-Steckdosen-Verbindung muss jederzeit zugnglich sein, da sie die Netztrennstelle ist. Das Gert hat mehrere Energiequellen, daher ist es notwendig, stets alle Verbindungen zu unterbrechen, um den energiefreien Zustand zu erreichen. Das mit Wechselstrom betriebene Modell hat eine Zweiphasen-Sicherung. Um die Brandgefahr zu minimieren, drfen ausschlielich Nr. 26 AWG oder leistungsfhigere Telekommunikationskabel verwendet werden. Personensicherheit Betreiben Sie das Gert und die Kabel nicht whrend eines Gewitters. Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, drfen Kleinspannungsschaltungen (SELV) nicht mit Telefonnetzwerken (TNV) verbunden werden. Blicken Sie nicht direkt in den optischen Anschluss, da die Laserstrahlung zu Augenverletzungen fhren kann. Tragen Sie keinen Schmuck oder Uhren, wenn Sie am Gert arbeiten. Bediener Das Gert darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal installiert, konfiguriert und zerlegt werden. Das Gert darf nur von autorisierten Personen betrieben werden. Ein Austausch oder eine nderung des Gerts oder der Teile des Gerts (einschl. der Software) darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal oder von Personen durchgefhrt werden, die von Huawei autorisiert sind. Jeder Fehler und jede Strung, die die Sicherheit verletzen knnten, sind sofort den verantwortlichen Personen zu melden. Nur qualifiziertes Fachpersonal darf Sicherheitseinrichtungen beseitigen oder auer Betrieb setzen, und Fehlersuche oder Wartungsarbeiten durchfhren. Lesen und befolgen Sie alle Anweisungen sorgfltig, bevor Sie mit dem Arbeiten beginnen. Das Dokument enthlt auch Richtlinien zur Auswahl der Mess- und Prfinstrumente. 4-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit 4.2.1 Hochspannung Hochspannungsleitungen stellen die fr den Betrieb des Gerts erforderliche Energie zur Verfgung. Direkter oder indirekter Kontakt (durch feuchte Gegenstnde) mit Hochspannung und Wechselstromversorgung kann zu tdlichen Unfllen fhren. Whrend des Aufstellens der Wechselstromversorgungseinheit sind die lokalen Sicherheitsvorschriften einzuhalten. Das Personal fr das Aufstellen der Wechselstromeinheit muss fr Arbeiten an Hochspannung und Wechselstrom qualifiziert sein. Tragen Sie whrend der Arbeiten keine leitfhigen Gegenstnde wie Uhren, Armreifen, Ketten oder Ringe. Sollte sich Wasser im Gestell befinden oder das Gestell feucht sein, ist die Energiezufuhr sofort zu unterbrechen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Gert trocken ist, wenn die Arbeiten in einer feuchten Umgebung durchgefhrt werden. Die Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitsvorschriften bei der Arbeit mit Hochspannung kann zu Feuer und elektrischem Schlag fhren. Deshalb muss die Verlegung von Leitungen und Verbindungen den rtlichen Anforderungen und Sicherheitsvorschriften entsprechen. Arbeiten mit Hochspannung drfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgefhrt werden. 4.2.2 Gewitter Hochspannung und Betrieb mit Wechselstrom oder Arbeiten auf einem Stahlturm und -mast sind whrend Gewittern verboten. Das elektromagnetische Feld, das whrend eines Gewitters entsteht, kann die Elektronik beschdigen. Um die Ausrstung vor Beschdigung durch Blitzschlag zu schtzen, ist eine ordnungsgeme Erdung erforderlich. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-19 GEFAHRWARNUNGGEFAHR 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.2.3 Werkzeuge Compliance and Safety Manual Vorschlag: Fr Arbeiten mit Hochspannung und Wechselstrom sind Spezialwerkzeuge zu verwenden. Normale Werkzeuge drfen nicht verwendet werden. 4.2.4 Hoher Kriechstrom Erden Sie das Gert bevor Sie es anschalten. Es besteht sonst Gefahr fr Menschen und das Gert. Wenn sich die Markierung hoher Kriechstrom am Leistungsanschluss des Gertes befindet, mssen Sie das Gert erden, bevor Sie es anschalten. 4.2.5 Zuleitung Eine Installation und ein Entfernen stromfhrender Leitungen ist verboten. Kurzschlsse zwischen innerem und uerem Leiter knnen Lichtbgen oder Funkenflug verursachen, was zu Feuer oder einer Augenverletzung fhren kann. Das System muss stets abgeschaltet werden, bevor die Zuleitung angebracht oder entfernt wird. berprfen Sie vor dem Anbringen der Zuleitung immer, ob das von Ihnen verwendete Kabel den Anforderungen entspricht. Verwenden Sie fr ein mit Gleichstrom betriebenes Gert ein Stromversorgungskabel mit mind. 1,0 mm oder 16 AWG. Verwenden Sie fr ein mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Gert ein Stromversorgungskabel mit mind. 1,0 mm oder 16 AWG. Es sind Typ H03VVF oder eine leichte PVC-Schlauchleitung entsprechend IEC 60227 zu benutzen. 4-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNUNGWARNUNGWARNUNGVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4.2.6 Sicherung 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Ersetzen Sie die Sicherung bei Bedarf immer nur mit einem Sicherungstyp, der die gleichen technischen Daten besitzt. 4.2.7 Elektrostatische Entladung Die vom menschlichen Krper erzeugte elektrostatische Elektrizitt kann sensible elektrostatische Bauteile auf der Leiterplatte beschdigen, zum Beispiel integrierte Schaltkreise (ICs). Der menschliche Krper erzeugt in den folgenden Situationen ein statisches elektromagnetisches Feld:
Bei Bewegung Durch Reibung der Kleidung Durch Reibung zwischen den Schuhen und dem Boden Beim Halten von normalem Kunststoff in der Hand Das statische elektromagnetische Feld bleibt lange Zeit im Krper. Tragen Sie beim Berhren des Gerts, mit der Hand zu bedienenden Teilen, Leiterplatten oder ASICs ein geerdetes Armband zur elektrostatischen Entladung (ESD). Dies kann verhindern, dass empfindliche Bauteile durch statische Elektrizitt im menschlichen Krper beschdigt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-21 WARNUNGVORSICHT 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Figure 4-1 zeigt das Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes. Figure 4-1 Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes Compliance and Safety Manual 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung Jegliches Betreiben des elektrischen Gertes in einer feuergefhrlichen Umgebung verursacht Gefahr. Stellen Sie das Gert nicht bei Umgebungsbedingungen auf, wo brennbare und explosive Luft oder Gase vorherrschen. Nehmen Sie bei diesen Umgebungsbedingungen das Gert nicht in Betrieb. 4-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) GEFAHR Compliance and Safety Manual 4.4 Batterie 4.4.1 Speicherbatterie 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Lesen Sie vor dem Umgang mit der Batterie die Sicherheitsmanahmen sorgfltig durch, die beim Umgang mit der Batterie und beim Anschlieen ergriffen werden sollen. Nicht vorschriftsgeme Arbeiten an den Batterien knnen Gefahren beinhalten. Whrend des Betriebs:
Schtzen Sie die Batterie vor Kurzschluss. Verhindern Sie berlaufen und Auslaufen der Elektrolytflssigkeit. Das berlaufen von Elektrolytflssigkeit kann das Gert beschdigen. Es kann Metallteile und die Leiterplatten korrodieren und das Gert beschdigen, sowie zu Kurzschlssen in den Leiterplatten fhren. Allgemeiner Betrieb Beachten Sie Folgendes whrend der Montage und Wartung von Batterien:
Tragen Sie keine metallischen Gegenstnde wie Uhren, Armreifen, Ketten und Ringe. Benutzen Sie isoliertes Spezialwerkzeug. Tragen Sie eine Schutzbrille whrend der Bedienung des Gerts. Tragen Sie Gummihandschuhe und eine Schrze fr den Fall des berlaufens von Elektrolytflssigkeit. Halten Sie die Elektrode beim Umgang mit der Batterie immer senkrecht vor sich. Drehen Sie Batterie nicht um und kippen Sie sie nicht. Kurzschluss Der Kurzschluss der Batterie kann Verletzungen zur Folge haben. Auch wenn die Spannung einer normalen Batterie gering ist, setzt hoher bergangsstrom, der durch einen Kurzschluss verursacht wird, eine groe Menge Energie frei. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-23 GEFAHRVORSICHTWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Bei unsachgemem Einsetzen der Batterie besteht die Gefahr einer Explosion. Ersetzen Sie die Batterie daher nur mit dem gleichen oder einem hnlichem, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp. Halten Sie metallische Gegenstnde von der Batterie fern, die einen Kurzschluss verursachen knnten. Wenn sie verwendet werden mssen, trennen Sie zuerst die verwendeten Batterien, bevor Sie andere Arbeiten durchfhren. Gefhrliches Gas Verwenden Sie keine unversiegelten Bleisurebatterien, da das Gas, das von der Batterie abgegeben wird, zu einem Feuer oder einer Korrosion des Gerts fhren kann. Legen Sie die Batterie horizontal hin und befestigen Sie sie richtig. Die verwendete Batterie gibt brennbares Gas ab. Stellen Sie die Batterie deshalb an einem Ort mit guter Belftung auf und ergreifen Sie Vorsichtsmanahmen gegen Feuer. Hohe Temperatur Hohe Temperatur kann zu einem Verziehen, Schaden oder berlaufen der Elektrolytflssigkeit der Batterie fhren. Wenn die Temperatur der Batterie 60 C bersteigt, sollten Sie prfen, ob Sureflssigkeit berluft. Falls Sureflssigkeit berluft, beseitigen Sie die Sureflssigkeit sofort. Sureflssigkeit Falls Sureflssigkeit berluft, absorbieren und neutralisieren Sie die Flssigkeit sofort. 4-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) VORSICHTVORSICHTVORSICHTVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Beachten Sie beim Bewegen oder Entfernen einer auslaufenden Batterie den mglichen Schaden, der durch die Sureflssigkeit verursacht werden kann. Wenn Sie verschttete Sureflssigkeit gefunden haben, verwenden Sie die folgenden Materialien, um sie zu absorbieren und zu neutralisieren. Natriumbikarbonat (Backpulver): NaHCO3 Natriumkarbonat (Soda): Na2CO3 Bei Verwendung von surebindenden Mitteln mssen die Anweisungen des Batterielieferanten befolgt werden. 4.4.2 Lithium-Batterie Bei unsachgemem Einsetzen der Batterie besteht die Gefahr einer Explosion. Ersetzen Sie die Batterie daher nur mit dem gleichen oder einem hnlichem, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien gem den Anweisungen des Herstellers. Verbrennen Sie Lithium-Batterien nicht. 4.5 Laser Die von diesem Laser ausgehende Gefahr entspricht der Klasse 1. Halten Sie bei der Handhabung von optischen Fasern Abstand und schauen Sie nicht ohne Augenschutz in das Ende von optischen Fasern. 4.5.1 Allgemeine Informationen zum Laser Lasersender und -empfnger werden in optischen bertragungs- und berwachungssystemen eingesetzt. Die Wellenlnge des Lasers betrgt zwischen 780 nm und 1600 nm. Die Laserenergie, die durch optische Fasern bertragen wird, hat eine sehr hohe Energiedichte. Das Laserlicht ist aber nicht sichtbar fr das menschliche Auge. Wenn ein Lichtstrahl in das Auge eindringt, kann die Retina beschdigt werden. Bei der im Telekommunikationsbereich genutzten Wellenlnge von Lasern kann die Retina durch Wrme geschdigt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-25 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Laser, die in Lichtwellenleitersystemen verwendet werden, weisen eine grere Streuung des Lichtstrahls auf, typisch sind Werte zwischen 10 und 20. Der versehentliche Blick in eine beschdigte oder nicht abgeschlossene optische Faser ohne Augenschutz aus einer Entfernung von mehr als 150 mm verursacht keine Verletzung der Augen. Es kann aber zu Augenverletzungen kommen, wenn optische Instrumente, wie z. B. ein Mikroskop, Vergrerungsglas oder eine Lupe verwendet werden, um das spannungsfhrende Faserende zu betrachten. Im normalen Betriebszustand ist ein LWL-System komplett abgeschlossen und stellt keine Gefahr von Augenverletzungen dar. Zustzliche Sicherheit wird durch eine automatische Laserabschaltung (ALS) des Systems erreicht werden. Die ALS kann jedoch nur fr bidirektionale bertragung angewendet werden. Wenn die Empfngerseite den Laser von der Senderseite nicht erkennt, gibt er ein Signal an die Senderseite aus. Die ALS beendet die Lasersendung in weniger als 100 ms nach Erhalt des Signals. 4.5.2 Sicherheitsrichtlinien fr Laser Beachten Sie die folgenden Richtlinien, um Laserstrahlung zu vermeiden:
Lesen Sie alle Anweisungen, bevor Sie das Gert installieren, warten und in Betrieb nehmen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisungen kann zu gefhrlicher Laserstrahlung fhren. Tragen Sie whrend des Umgangs mit den optischen Fasern oder mit dem Laser eine Schutzbrille. Die Bedienung darf nur durch Personal erfolgen, das die entsprechenden Schulungen absolviert hat. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die optische Quelle abgeschaltet ist, bevor Sie die Verbindungen der optischen Fasern abklemmen. Bevor Sie die vordere Tr eines optischen bertragungssystems ffnen, mssen Sie sicherstellen, dass Sie keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt werden knnen. Sehen Sie niemals in das Ende einer freigelegten Faser oder in eine offene Verbindung, wenn Sie nicht sicher sind, dass die optische Quelle auch tatschlich abgeschaltet ist. Messen Sie mit einem optischen Leistungsmesser die optische Leistung, um festzustellen, ob die optische Quelle ausgeschaltet ist. Benutzen Sie keine optischen Instrumente, wie z. B. ein Mikroskop, Vergrerungsglas oder eine Lupe, um die Fasern oder die Verbindungen anzusehen. 4.5.3 Umgang mit Fasern Lesen Sie die Anweisungen, bevor Sie mit den Fasern arbeiten. Schneiden und Verbinden von Fasern darf nur von geschultem Personal durchgefhrt werden. Vergewissern Sie sich stets vor dem Trennen und Verbinden von Fasern, dass diese auch wirklich von der optischen Quelle getrennt wurden. Nach dem Abklemmen der Fasern mssen alle optischen Verbindungen durch spezielle Verschlusskappen geschtzt werden. 4-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen Achten Sie beim Arbeiten in groen Hhen darauf, dass keine Gegenstnde herunterfallen. Bei Arbeiten in groen Hhen sind folgende Anforderungen einzuhalten. Das in groer Hhe arbeitende Personal muss geschult sein. Der Betrieb von Maschinen und Werkzeugen muss sicher ausgefhrt werden, um ein Herunterfallen zu vermeiden. Es mssen Sicherheitsmanahmen ergriffen werden, zum Beispiel das Tragen eines Helms und eines Sicherheitsgurts. Tragen Sie in kalten Gegenden warme Kleidung, wenn Sie Arbeiten in groer Hhe durchfhren. Alle Hebegerte mssen vor Beginn der Arbeiten sorgfltig berprft werden. 4.6.1 Heben von groen Gewichten Betreten Sie beim Heben von groen Gewichten keine Bereiche unter dem Ausleger und hngenden Gegenstnden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Bediener die entsprechenden Schulungen abgeschlossen haben und qualifiziert sind. berprfen Sie die Werkzeuge zum Heben des Gewichts und vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Werkzeuge in gutem Zustand sind. Heben Sie das Gewicht nur, wenn die Werkzeuge zum Heben des Gewichts fest an einem Gegenstand, der das Gewicht aushlt, oder an einer Wand befestigt sind. Verwenden Sie einen knappen Befehl, um Fehlbedienung zu vermeiden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Winkel zwischen den zwei Kabeln whrend des Hebens hchstens 90 Grad betrgt. (siehe Figure 4-2). Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-27 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Figure 4-2 Heben von groen Gewichten Compliance and Safety Manual 4.6.2 Sicherheitsleitfaden zur Verwendung von Leitern berprfen der Leiter berprfen Sie vor Verwendung der Leiter zuerst, ob die Leiter in gutem Zustand ist. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie das maximale Gewicht kennen, das die Leiter tragen kann. Ein berlasten der Leiter ist strengstens verboten. Aufstellen der Leiter Der Neigungswinkel sollte 75 Grad sein. Die Neigung kann mit einem Winkelmesser oder mit den Armen gemessen werden. Stellen Sie bei Verwendung einer Leiter das breitere Ende der Leiter auf den Boden. Ergreifen Sie ansonsten Schutzmanahmen am unteren Teil der Leiter, um ein Rutschen zu verhindern. Stellen Sie die Leiter auf einen stabilen Boden. 4-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Maximal Compliance and Safety Manual Besteigen der Leiter 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Beachten Sie beim Besteigen der Leiter Folgendes. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Schwerpunkt Ihres Krper nicht jenseits des Randes der Leiter liegt. Um die Gefahr zu verringern und die Sicherheit zu gewhrleisten, sollten Sie vor der Durchfhrung irgendwelchen Arbeiten sicher auf der Leiter stehen. Steigen Sie nicht hher als die vierthchste Stufe der Leiter. Wenn Sie ganz nach oben klettern, sollte die Lnge der Leiter einen Meter hher als die Traufe sein. 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit 4.7.1 Bohren Bohren auf dem Gestell ohne Erlaubnis ist strengstens verboten. Bohren, das die entsprechenden Anforderungen nicht erfllt, kann die Drhte und Kabel im Gestell beschdigen. Wenn Metallspne aufgrund des Bohrens in das Gestell fallen, kann dies zu einem Kurzschluss der Leiterplatten fhren. Tragen Sie beim Bohren eines Lochs am Gestell isolierte Handschuhe und entfernen Sie die Kabel im Gestell. Stellen Sie whrend des Bohrens sicher, dass Ihre Augen geschtzt sind. Heie Spne knnen Ihre Augen verletzen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass keine Metallspne in das Gestell gelangen. Nicht vorschriftsgemes Bohren kann die elektromagnetische Abschirmung des Gestells beschdigen. Entfernen Sie die Metallspne nach dem Bohren umgehend. 4.7.2 Scharfkantige Gegenstnde Tragen Sie, wenn Sie das Gert von Hand transportieren, Schutzhandschuhe, um Verletzungen durch scharfkantige Gegenstnde zu vermeiden. 4.7.3 Umgang mit Ventilatoren Stellen Sie Folgendes sicher:
Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-29 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Stellen Sie beim Austauschen eines Bauteils das Bauteil, die Schrauben und das Werkzeug an einen sicheren Ort, um zu verhindern, dass sie in den laufenden Lfter fallen. Stecken Sie beim Austauschen der Umgebungsvorrichtungen rund um den Lfter nicht Ihre Finger oder die Leiterplatte in den laufenden Lfter. Warten Sie, bis der Lfter ausgeschaltet ist und nicht mehr luft. 4.7.4 Heben schwerer Gegenstnde Stehen oder gehen Sie beim Heben schwerer Gegenstnde nicht unter dem Arm oder dem gehobenen Gegenstand. 4.8 Verschiedenes 4.8.1 Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten Beachten Sie beim Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten die folgenden Anforderungen:
Behandeln Sie Leiterplatten beim Einsetzen vorsichtig, um ein Verdrehen der Stifte auf der Rckseite zu verhindern. Setzen Sie Leiterplatten nur entlang der Fhrungsschlitze ein. Die zwei Seiten einer Leiterplatte sollten keine andere Leiterplatte berhren, um Kurzschlsse oder Kratzer zu verhindern. Berhren Sie die Leiterplatte, Bauteile, Anschlsse oder Anschlussschlitze nicht, wenn Sie eine Leiterplatte in der Hand halten. 4.8.2 Bndeln von Signalleitungen 4-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNUNGVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Bndeln Sie die Signalleitungen getrennt von Starkstromkabeln oder Hochspannungskabeln. Benutzen Sie Kabelbinder in einen Abstand von maximal 150 mm. 4.8.3 Verkabelungsanforderungen Bei sehr niedrigen Temperaturen kann eine Bewegung der Kabel die Kunststoffhlle der Kabel beschdigen. Um die Bausicherheit zu gewhrleisten, befolgen Sie die nachfolgenden Anordnungen:
Stellen Sie beim Installieren von Kabeln sicher, dass die Umgebungstemperatur ber 0 C liegt. Wenn Kabel an Orten unter 0 C aufbewahrt werden, sollten Sie die Kabel an einen Ort mit Raumtemperatur transportieren und dort die Kabel vor der Installation mindestens 24 Stunden aufbewahren. Bewegen Sie die Kabel vorsichtig, besonders bei niedrigen Temperaturen. Lassen Sie die Kabel nicht direkt vom Fahrzeug fallen. 4.9 3G Antenne Der Produkt benutzt Standard 3G Antenne, Einrichtung und Wartung darf nur von der qualifizierten Person ausgefhrt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-31 VORSICHTVORSICHT
1 2 | User manual II | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers V200R001C01 Hardware Description Issue Date 03 2012-04-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document About This Document Intended Audience This document provides an overall description of the AR routers, details about each chassis and board, cables available to the device, and lists of components. This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers l Hardware installation engineers l Commissioning engineers l On-site maintenance engineers l System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DANGERWARNINGCAUTIONTIPNOTE Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Change History About This Document Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 02 (2012-03-30) Based on issue 01 (2011-12-30), this issue has the following updates:
l The AR2220-S model is added. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-12-30) Initial commercial release. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Version Matching..........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions..............................................................................................3 2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................7 2.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................8 2.2 Naming Convention............................................................................................................................................8 2.3 Device Structure.................................................................................................................................................9 2.3.1 AR1200-S Series.......................................................................................................................................9 2.3.2 AR2200-S Series.....................................................................................................................................12 2.4 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................14 2.5 Physical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................14 3 Power Supply Units....................................................................................................................16 3.1 Power Supply Configuration............................................................................................................................17 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts..........................................................................................................17 3.2.1 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................17 3.2.2 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit......................................................................................18 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D..........................................................................................................................................19 4 Heat Dissipation System............................................................................................................23 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process..................................................................................................................................24 5 Cards..............................................................................................................................................25 5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................26 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards..................................................................................................................26 5.1.2 Interface Numbering................................................................................................................................27 5.1.3 Card Dimensions.....................................................................................................................................28 5.2 WLAN Subcard................................................................................................................................................29 5.2.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................29 5.2.2 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................29 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card............................................................................................................................29 5.3.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card.............30 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 5.3.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card............................................................33 5.4 WAN Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................36 5.4.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card)....................................................................................36 5.4.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card.......................................................................................................40 5.4.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card................42 5.4.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card)..............................47 5.4.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card..................................................50 5.4.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card)..................................................................................54 5.4.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card)......................................................................................56 5.4.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card).......................................................................59 5.4.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card).................................................................................................62 5.4.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card).........................................................................67 5.4.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card..............................................................................69 5.5 Voice Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................73 5.5.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card)......................................................................................73 5.5.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card.............................................................77 5.5.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module.......................................................................................................80 5.6 xDSL Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................81 5.6.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card........................81 5.6.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card.............................................................85 5.6.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card).......................................................................87 5.6.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card)......................................................................91 6 Cables.............................................................................................................................................95 6.1 AC Power Cable...............................................................................................................................................97 6.2 DC Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................98 6.3 Ground Cable..................................................................................................................................................100 6.4 Console Cable.................................................................................................................................................101 6.5 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................102 6.6 Optical Fiber...................................................................................................................................................105 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables........................................................................................................................................109 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables......................................................................................114 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables..........................................................................................................................................120 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables...........................................................................................................................................122 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines..............................................................................................................................126 6.12 8AS Cable.....................................................................................................................................................127 6.13 3G Antenna...................................................................................................................................................132 7 List of Indicators........................................................................................................................136 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel.................................................................................................................137 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel.................................................................................................................140 7.3 Power Indicators.............................................................................................................................................142 8 List of Cards................................................................................................................................145 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR............................................................................................................................146 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight....................................................................................................................149 9 List of Interface Attributes.......................................................................................................150 9.1 Electrical Interfaces........................................................................................................................................152 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes.............................................................................................................153 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes..............................................................................................................................155 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................156 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................157 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes.................................................................................158 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................159 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................159 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes..........................................................................................161 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface...............................................................................................................162 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface....................................................................................................................162 9.12 3G Interface Attributes.................................................................................................................................163 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes............................................................................................................................164 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1 Version Matching About This Chapter This section describes the matching relationships between the chassis, power supplies, cards, and system software versions of AR routers. NOTE l AR version roadmap: ARV200R001C01, ARV200R002C00, ARV200R002C01. l Unless otherwise specified, if a power supply or card is supported by version A, it is also supported by all versions later than version A. 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. Table 1-1 Matching between product models and software versions Model Software Version ARV200R001C01 AR1200-S series AR2200-S series AR12 20-S AR12 20W-
S AR22 20-S ARV200R002C00 ARV200R002C01 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. Table 1-2 Matching between power supplies and software versions Model&Version 3.3 HW-100-48AC 14D PWR150A 60 W AC Power Supply Unit in an Open Rack ARV200R001C01&
ARV200R002C00&
ARV200R002C01 AR1220-S AR1220W-
S AR2220-S Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Table 1-3 Matching between power modes and software versions Model&Versi on Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Dual Non-
PoE AC Power Supply Units AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S ARV2 00R0 01C0 1&A RV20 0R00 2C00
&AR V200 R002 C01 Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 1-4 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R0 02C01 SIC WSIC XSIC voice card AR1220-
S AR1220 W-S AR2220-
S Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 1-5 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 AR1220-S SRU WLAN Subcard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version C00&ARV200R 002C01 SRU WLAN Subcard AR1220W-S AR2220-S Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 1-6 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S 8FE1GE 24GE AR2220-S Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 1-7 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&Ver sion 1S A 2S A 2F E 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S ARV 200R 001C 01 ARV 200R 002C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Ver sion 2F E 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S ARV 200R 002C 01 Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 1-8 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200R0 01C01 AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S ARV200R0 02C00&AR V200R002 C01 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR22 20-S Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 1-9 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 1C01 ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL AR122 0-S 1PON AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S ARV2 00R00 2C00 ARV2 00R00 2C01 VDSL Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2 Chassis About This Chapter This section describes the characteristics, naming rules, appearance, structure, system performance, and technical specifications of the AR routers. 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.4 System Configuration 2.5 Physical Specifications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. Description Models Huawei AR Enterprise Router (AR router for short) are the next-generation routers integrating data,voice, security, routing, switching, and virtual private network (VPN) functions. As an egress gateway for enterprises, the AR routers use the multi-core CPU processing capabilities and rapid expansibility. The AR routers offer the following models. Model AR1200
-S AR1220-
S AR1220 W-S AR2200 AR2220-
S Characteristics The AR1220-S is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]), uses a 60 W open frame AC power supply, and supports two SIC slots. The integrated SRU provides eight fixed FE interfaces and two fixed GE electrical interfaces. l Compared with the AR1220-S, the AR1220W-S supports the Wi-
Fi function and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220W-S chassis is AR1220W-S and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. The AR2220-S is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm), uses a 150 W AC power supply unit, and supports four SIC cards and two WSIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 3GE interfaces (including one combo interface). The backplane is in the middle of the chassis, and cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. NOTE l SIC: Service Interface Card. This is the smallest card supported by ARs. l WSIC: Wide SIC. The same height as a SIC, but twice the width. l XSIC: Extended SIC. Double the height and width of an XSIC and twice those of a SIC. NOTE In this document, AR1200S indicates AR1220S and AR1220WS. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-1 Naming convention 2 Chassis ARB1 B2 B3 B4C1-D1 Example:
AR1220 -S Table 2-1 Naming convention of AR routers Field B1 Description Product series code. AR routers includes series 1 and 2. B2 B3 B4 C1 D1 Fixed as 2, indicating enterprise router. Number of service card slots (dependent on B1):
l When B1 is 1, B3 indicates the number of SIC cards. l When B1 is 2, B3 indicates the number of WSIC and XSIC cards. The value is fixed as 0. C1 contains one or two upper-case letters. l W: WLAN l V: voice l A: AC (This is the default configuration, so A is not contained in the product name) l D: DC l S: Soho 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.3.1 AR1200-S Series This section describes the structure of the AR1200-S. Appearance Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show front views of AR1200-S. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-2 AR1220-S front view 2 Chassis Figure 2-3 AR1220W-S front view 18 19 18 20 Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 show rear views of AR1200-S. Figure 2-4 AR1220-S rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-5 AR1220W-S rear view 2 Chassis 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 7: Security lock 10: AC power switch 11: PoE port 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 12: Fixed 8FE interface on the panel 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. 19: Antenna 20: WLAN switch Slot Distribution Figure 2-6 shows slot distribution on AR1200-S. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-6 AR1200-S slot distribution on Device Model Front view AR1200
-S Slot Distribution Slot Combination NA NA Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 0(SRU) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 2(WSIC) 0(SRU) As shown in Figure 2-6, the slots of AR1200-S can be combined :
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. 2.3.2 AR2200-S Series This section describes the structure of the AR2200-S. Appearance Figure 2-7 show front views of AR2200-S. Figure 2-7 AR2220-S front view 10 4 16 17 13 18 14 15 Figure 2-8 show rear views of AR2200-S. Figure 2-8 AR2220-S rear view 23 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 10: AC power switch 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 16: Micro SD card interface 17: GE optical/
electrical Combo interface 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. Slot Distribution Figure 2-9 shows slot distribution on AR2200-S. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Figure 2-9 AR2200-S slot distribution Device Model Front view AR2220
-S Rear view Slot Distribution Slot Combination 7(Power) 0(SRU) NA 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) As shown in Figure 2-9, the slots of AR2200-S can be combined :
l AR2220-S Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.4 System Configuration Table 2-2 System configuration Model Processor AR1200-S Series AR2220-S 2-core: 500 MHz 4-core: 600 MHz Memory 512 MB 2 GB Flash Memory 256 MB Micro SD Card 0 16 MB 2 GB 2.5 Physical Specifications Table 2-3 Physical specifications Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Description l Without rack-mounting ear:
AR1200-S: 390.0 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm (15.35 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220-S: 442.0 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm (17.4 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) l With rack-mounting ear:
AR1200-S: 482.6 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm (19 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220-S: 482.6 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm (19 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) Maximum power consumption Full configuration Empty chassis Weight Full configuration Empty chassis Operating temperature Relative humidity l AR1200-S: 52 W l AR2220-S: 95 W l AR1200-S: 33.3 W l AR2220-S: 65.1 W l AR1200-S: 3.60 kg (7.94 lb) l AR2220-S: 8.45 kg (18.63 lb) l AR1200-S: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) l AR2220-S: 4.95 kg (10.91 lb) 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Item Altitude AC input voltage Long-term operating altitude Description Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Storage altitude Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Rated voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz Maximum voltage 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3 Power Supply Units About This Chapter This section describes the power supply units supported by the AR routers. CAUTION l Power off the AR routers before removing or performing maintenance on the power supply units. l To power off the AR routers , power off all its power supply units. 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. Table 3-1 describes the power supply units supported by each model. Table 3-1 Power supply units supported by each model Power Supply Unit Description 60 W AC power supply unit in an open rack AC power supply unit fixed in the chassis Installation Fixed in the chassis, does not need to be connected to the chassis using cables. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D External PoE AC power supply unit PWR150A AC power supply unit Connected to the PoE port at the back of the chassis using its own power cable. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Maintenance Maintain together with the chassis. Maintain independently from the chassis. Maintain together with the chassis. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.2.1 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-1 shows the layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-1 Layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.2 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-2 shows the layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-2 Layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard
-53V RTN PoE Port (FE4~FE7) 12V GND
-53V RTN Motherboard PSE on the SRU PWR PWR L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding 5. RTN: Power ground cable The non-PoE AC power supply unit and PoE AC power supply unit are independent of each other:
l Non-PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. l PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PoE module, the PoE module outputs -53 V voltage, and then the PSE on the SRU provides power for the powered devices (PDs) connected to the PoE interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-3 illustrates the naming convention of the HW-100-48AC14D. Figure 3-3 HW-100-48AC14D naming convention HW-100-48AC14D 1 2 3 4 5 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Product brand Output power parameters l 100: The output power is 100 W. l 48: The output voltage is 48 V. Power supply unit type l A (Alternate): AC/DC power supply unit l D (Direct): DC/DC power supply unit Socket type l C14 is a type of socket. D (Desk), indicating the desktop power supply. Functions The HW-100-48AC14D uses 90 V AC-264 V AC input power, and provide 48 V/100 W output power when no fan is used. Table 3-2 describes the protection functions provided by the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-2 Protection functions of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Minimu m Value
-
Typical Value
-
Maximu m Value 62 V Input protecti on Output protecti on Input undervolta ge protection Input undervolta ge recovery Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurrent protection Output short-
circuit protection
-
Overheating protection
-
-
51 V
-
-
80 V 58 V 2.5 A 3 A 3.5 A
-
-
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Hysteresis is not smaller than 5 V. Output voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output current can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. No smoke will be generated. Temperature is reduced below 55C (131F). Appearance Figure 3-4 shows the appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 Appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D Table 3-3 describes meanings of the indicators. Table 3-3 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. Technical Specifications Table 3-4 describes the technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D. Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 72 mm x 171 mm x 40 mm (2.83 in. x 6.73 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight 0.65 kg (1.5 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Rated operating voltage Rated output current Rated output voltage Specification 100 V AC to 240 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC 2.08 A 48 V Output power 100 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 20% RH to 80% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4 Heat Dissipation System About This Chapter This section describes the heat dissipation system of the AR router. The fan module of the AR router is described as follows:
l The fan module of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S is located on the right side in the chassis. The fan module dimensions of the AR1200-S are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm
[0.79 in.] (depth). The fan module dimensions of the AR2220-S are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm
[0.79 in.] (depth). 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. NOTE The heat dissipation system ensures that the AR routers operates at a normal temperature. For temperature requirements, see 2.5 Physical Specifications. Figure 4-1 shows air circulation through the AR1200-S chassis. Figure 4-1 Air circulation through the AR1200-S chassis Figure 4-2 shows air circulation through the AR2220-S chassis. Figure 4-2 Air circulation through the AR2220-S chassis Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5 Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the cards supported by the AR routers. 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.2 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.4 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.5 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.6 xDSL Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards This section describes the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR2240, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR3260, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 illustrates the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200S, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220S, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 Relationships between cards on the AR1200-S SRU Fan Service card Service card Power Backplane Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-2 Relationships between cards on the AR2220-S Backplane Service card Service card SRU Fan Power 5.1.2 Interface Numbering This section describes the interface numbering scheme on the AR routers. On the AR routers, interfaces are numbered in the format of slot ID/subcard ID/interface sequence number. l Slot ID The slot ID specifies the ID of the slot where a card resides. The SRU of the AR1200-S and 2220-S is integrated with the chassis, so the slot ID is fixed as 0. When slots need to be combined into one slot, the greater slot ID is used as the new slot ID. For example, when slot 1 and slot 2 are combined, slot ID 2 is used as the new slot ID. l Subcard ID The subcard ID specifies the ID of a subcard. The cards of AR routers series routers do not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard ID of the AR routers is fixed as 0. l Interface sequence number The interface sequence number indicates the number of each interface on a card. There is only one row of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from left to right starting with 0. 0 1 2 3 There are two rows of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from bottom to top and left to right starting with 0. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 5.1.3 Card Dimensions This section explains the conventions for measuring cards and lists the dimensions of SIC, WSIC, XSIC card. Figure 5-3 illustrates the dimensions of a card. Figure 5-3 Card dimensions description Height Width Depth NOTE The card dimensions are defined as follows:
l Depth: the distance between the handle and the end of Printed Circuit Board (PCB) l Width: the longest distance between the tops of two handles l Height: the height of the ejector lever Figure 5-4 shows the cards supported by the AR routers and Table 5-1 lists the card dimensions. Figure 5-4 Card appearances SIC WSIC XSIC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-1 Card dimensions Card Type SIC card WSIC card XSIC card Dimensions (Depth x Width x Height) 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) 5.2 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.2.1 Functions and Applications Functions l WLAN subcards provide Wi-Fi interfaces. Wi-Fi interfaces comply with IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, and 802.11b, and each of these interfaces provides a maximum of 300 Mbit/s transmission rate. l WLAN subcards provide a high wireless performance and reliability, and large coverage scope using the multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) technology. l WLAN subcards support 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, WPA/WPA2 encryption, and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK encryption to provide secure data transmission. Applications A WLAN subcard has a dedicated WLAN slot on the AR routers. 5.2.2 Technical Specifications Table 5-2 describes the technical specifications of the WLAN subcard. Table 5-2 Technical specifications of the WLAN subcard Item Maximum power consumption Specification 7.24 W 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.3.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/
L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 8FE1GE is the 8-port 100M+1-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 9-channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces and one GE electrical interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 100 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the eight FE interfaces. l The eight FE interfaces work at 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. The GE interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 8FE1GE can be installed into the WSIC slots of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S, On the AR1200-S, two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-5 shows the appearance of the 8FE1GE. Figure 5-5 Appearance of the 8FE1GE 1 2 3 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-3 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-3 Buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-5 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE/GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-4 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE. Table 5-4 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE Name Quan tity Description Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable 8 1 10BASE-TX/
100BASE-
TX electrical interface 1000BASE-T electrical interface The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. The 8FE1GE provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. Letter in Figure 5-5 a b Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-5 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-6 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-7 describes the technical specifications of the 8FE1GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-7 Technical specifications of the 8FE1GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.036 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 5.3.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 24GE is the 24-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 24-
channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 1000 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the 24 GE interfaces. l These interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 24GE can be installed into the XSIC slot on the AR2220-S. On the AR2220-S, two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-6 shows the appearance of the 24GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 5-6 Appearance of the 24GE 5 Cards 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-8 describes the buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel. Table 5-8 Buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel Number in Figure 5-6 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK 2: indicators of interfaces in the second row 3: indicators of interfaces in the first row Interfaces Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected. Table 5-9 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-9 Types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE Letter in Figure 5-6 a Qua ntity 24 Name 1000BASE-
T electrical interface Description Cable Type The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE services. 6.5 Network Cable Interface Attributes Table 5-10 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-11 describes the technical specifications of the 24GE. Table 5-11 Technical specifications of the 24GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.50 mm x 201.00 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) Maximum power consumption 25 W Weight 0.85 kg (1.88 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.4.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card) 1GEC is a 1-port 1000M Ethernet optical and electrical Combo interface card (RJ45, SFP). Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 1GEC stands for:
l 1: one interface l GE: 1000M Ethernet l C: Combo interface Functions and Applications Functions The 1GEC provides one GE optical and electrical Combo interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l The Combo interface sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. l The electrical interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. l The optical interface works at 100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. Applications The 1GEC is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-7 shows the appearance of the 1GEC panel. Figure 5-7 Appearance of the 1GEC panel 1 2 3 4 5 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-12 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-12 Buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel Number in Figure 5-7 1 Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow Green Yellow 2 and 3 4 and 5 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-13 describes the types and functions of interface on the 1GEC. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-13 Types and functions of the interface on the 1GEC Description Cable Type The 1GEC provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. NOTE Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 6.5 Network Cable The 1GEC provides one GE optical interface to transmit and receive GE services. 6.6 Optical Fiber Qu ant ity 1 1 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface 1000BA SE-X optical interface Lette r in Figur e 5-7 a b Interface Attributes Table 5-14 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-15 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Description 500 m 10 km Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 40 km 40 km 80 km 100 km Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-16 describes the technical specifications of the 1GEC. Table 5-16 Technical specifications of the 1GEC Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2.28 W Weight 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card The 2FE is the 2-port 100M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). Functions and Applications Functions The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l Two FE electrical interfaces can be bound to function as an upstream interface at the line rate of 200 Mbit/s. l The two FE interfaces work in 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 2FE can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S, AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-8 shows the appearance of the 2FE. Figure 5-8 Appearance of the 2FE 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-17 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-17 Buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel Number in Figure 5-8 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-18 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE. Name Table 5-18 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE Letter Description in Figure 5-8 a Qua ntit y 2 FE electrical interface The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-19 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-20 describes the technical specifications of the 2FE. Table 5-20 Technical specifications of the 2FE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 3.01 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M is the E1/T1/PRI/VE1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1/PRI/VE1 interfaces. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) indicates ISDN primary rate interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE l 1/2: indicates one or two interfaces. l E1: indicates E1 interfaces. l T1: indicates T1 interfaces. l M: indicates multiflex trunks. l VE1: indicates voice E1 interfaces. Table 5-21 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M. Table 5-21 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M Card Name 1E1T1-M 2E1T1-M Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 2E1T1-M cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-22 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-22 Slots of 2E1T1-M SIC and WSIC cards Card 2E1T1-M (SIC) 2E1T1-M (WSIC) Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M provides the following functions:
l Sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. l Provides CE1/T1 access. l Provides the ISDN PRI function. Applications 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M(SIC) can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. 2E1T1-M(WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220-S. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Panel and Interfaces 5 Cards Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-M. Figure 5-9 Appearance of the 1E1T1-M 1 2 a Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC). Figure 5-10 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC) 1 2 a Figure 5-11 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC). Figure 5-11 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC) 1 2 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-23 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-23 Buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel Number in Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10, Figure 5-11 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off 2 LINK/ACT Green Yellow (The indicator is in green and blinks red.) Off If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is in green and blinks red, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no connection. Interfaces Table 5-24 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Quantity Nam e Table 5-24 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Letter in Cable Type Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10, Figure 5-11 a Description DB9 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables 1E1T1-M: 1 2E1T1-M: 2 75-ohm or 120-
ohm E1 cable or 100-ohm T1 cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-25 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 5-26 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Technical Specifications Table 5-27 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-27 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2E1T1-M (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card) The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is the E1/T1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1 interfaces. NOTE 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F stands for:
l 1/2: one or two interfaces l E1: E1 interface l T1: T1 interface l F: fractional E1 Table 5-28 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F. Table 5-28 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F Card Name 1E1T1-F Quantity of Interfaces 1 2E1T1-F 2 Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. Table 5-29 describes the differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-29 Differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-
M Whether to Support the PRI Mode No Card Name 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Fractional E1 Mode Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can only be bundled into one channel at a rate of n x 64 kbit/s (n specifies the number of bundled timeslots and ranges from 1 to 31). 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can be bundled into multiple channels. Yes Applications The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces The 1E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-F panel. The 2E1T1-F and 2E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-F panel. Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-23 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F panel. Interfaces Table 5-24 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Interface Attributes Table 5-30 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Attribute Cable type Description E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode Unchannelized E1 Function Backup Terminal access Table 5-31 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-32 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Table 5-32 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card The 1SA/2SA is the 1-port/2-port synchronous/asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE l 1/2: indicates one interface or two interfaces. l S: indicates synchronous serial interface. l A: indicates asynchronous serial interface. Table 5-33 lists the number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA. Table 5-33 Number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 Card Name 1SA 2SA Functions and Applications Functions The 1SA/2SA provides the following functions:
l A synchronous serial interface can function as a DCE or DTE. It supports multiple physical layer protocols, such as V.24, V.35, and X.21, but does not support X.21 DCE. The maximum rate of V.24 is 64 kbit/s and V.35 is 2.048 Mbit/s. l An asynchronous serial interface supports the RS232 protocol and provides a maximum transmission rate of 115.2 kbit/s. l The 1SA/2SA provides system management channels by using in-band GE channels and implements in-service upgrade by using system management channels. l The system powers on or off the 1SA/2SA and monitors the current of the 1SA/2SA; the backplane provides 12 V voltage for the 1SA/2SA. l The 1SA/2SA is hot swappable. Applications 1SA/2SA can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S, and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-12 Appearance of the 1SA 1 2 3 a Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2SA. Figure 5-13 Appearance of the 2SA 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-34 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel. Table 5-34 Buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel Numbe r in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Numbe r in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Synchronous/
Asynchronous serial interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the LINK indicator is off, the link is not connected. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the ACT indicator is off, no data is transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-35 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA. Name Quantity Description Table 5-35 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA Lett er in Figu re 5-12 and Figu re 5-13 a DB28 1SA: 1 2SA: 2 The synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable is selected according to attributes of the connected line. Cable Type 6.8 Synchronous/
Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-36 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-37 describes the technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-37 Technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption Weight l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card) The 8AS is an 8-port asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE 8AS stands for:
l 8: eight interfaces l AS: asynchronous serial interface Functions and Applications Functions The 8AS sends, receives, and processes asynchronous data traffic. l Supports a maximum of 115.2 kbit/s transmission rate for each asynchronous serial interface. l Supports terminal access and asynchronous leased lines. l Functions as a dialup access server for small and medium-sized ISPs when asynchronous serial interfaces are used for dialup. Applications The 8AS is installed into the WSIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. On the AR1200-S, a WSIC slot consists of two SIC slots. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the 8AS panel. Figure 5-14 Appearance of the 8AS panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-38 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel. 5 Cards Table 5-38 Buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel Number in Figure 5-14 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK
(interface status indicator) 2 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. Interfaces Table 5-39 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS. Name Quant Table 5-39 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS Letter in Figure 5-14 a Description RJ45 ity 8 Interfaces on the 8AS send, receive, and process asynchronous data traffic using customized RJ45 cables. Cable Type 6.12 8AS Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes Table 5-40 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces 5 Cards Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-41 describes the technical specifications of the 8AS. Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the 8AS Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 8.9 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 5.4.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card) The 1BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides one ISDN S/T interface, which transmits data services. The 1BST transmits, receives, and processes 1-channel ISDN BRI S/T data flow. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions 5 Cards The 1BST provides one ISDN S/T interface for data access. The 1BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports TE mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications The 1BST is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-15 shows the appearance of the 1BST panel. Figure 5-15 Appearance of the 1BST panel 21 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-42 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel. Table 5-42 Buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel Number in Figure 5-15 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-15 Indicator Color Description Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-43 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST. Table 5-43 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST Name Quantity Description Cable Type RJ45 1 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Letter in Figure 5-15 a Interface Attributes Table 5-44 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Cable Technical Specifications Description l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-45 describes the technical specifications of the 1BST. Table 5-45 Technical specifications of the 1BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card) 1CPOS-155M provides an STM-1/OC3 optical interface to implement 63-channel E1 or 84-
channel T1 transmission in compliance with SDH/SONET. NOTE 1CPOS-155M stands for:
l 1: one interface l C: channelized l POS: Packet Over SDH/SONET l 155M: a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Functions and Applications Functions 1CPOS-155M has the following functions:
l Supports clear channel (unframed) E1, non-channelized (framed) E1, and channelized CE1. l Supports non-channelized (framed) T1 and channelized CT1. l Supports the link layer protocols such as HDLC and PPP and a maximum of 1024 HDLC channels. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Supports four SFP optical module types: short-distance multi-mode (1310 nm), mid-
distance single-mode (1310 nm), long-distance single-mode (1310 nm), and ultra-long-
distance single-mode (1550 nm). l Automatically starts and loads configurations after being powered on, provides the system management function using a GE inband channel, and uses the UART serial interface as the escape channel for subcard. l Uses the 12 V power provided by the backplane, be powered on and off by the main control board, and monitors voltage and current. l Be hot swappable. Applications 1CPOS-155M can be installed in a SIC slot of AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-16 shows the appearance of the 1CPOS-155M. Figure 5-16 Appearance of the 1CPOS-155M 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-46 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel. Table 5-46 Buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel Number in Figure 5-16 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-16 Indicator Color Description Off Green LINK ACT Yellow If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-47 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-47 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M Letter in Figure 5-16 a Quantit y 1 Name SFP optical interface Description Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber The 1CPOS-155M provides one SFP optical interface to transmit and receive SDH/
SONET frames. Interface Attributes Table 5-48 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description IP Attribute Network layer protocol Table 5-49 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km Center wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Extinction ratio
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode Technical Specifications Table 5-50 describes the technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-50 Technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card) A 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G antenna interfaces and one mini USB interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions and Applications Functions Applications The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides WAN access through WCDMA. The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-17 shows the appearance of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Figure 5-17 3G-HSPA+7 panel 1 2 3 4 a b a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-51 describes the buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel. 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-51 Buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel Number in Figure 5-17 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Orange Green 3G 2G Green 2 3 If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the 3G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 3G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 3G signals strength is medium. If the indicator is steady on, the 2G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 2G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 2G signals strength is medium. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-17 4 Indicator Color Description WWAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the 3G/2G connection is being established or is active. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received over the 3G/2G connection. If the indicator is off, the 3G/2G connection has not been established or is inactive. Interfaces Table 5-52 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Name Description Table 5-52 Types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card Lette r in Figu re 5-17 a Qu ant ity 2 3G antenna Cable Type Antenna interface The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G interfaces to transmit and receive 3G service data. One interface is the primary interface, and the other is the secondary interface. The mini USB interface is used to commission the 3G module. Mini USB cable 1 Mini USB interface b Interface Attributes Table 5-53 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate Description GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Installing a 3G SIM Card For details on how to installing a 3G SIM card on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card, see the AR1200&2200&3200 Quick Installation Guide. Technical Specifications Table 5-54 describes the technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Table 5-54 Technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 7 W 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card) The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces. 4GEW-T stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l T: electrical interface Functions and Applications Functions The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-T interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE electrical interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation mode. Applications The 4GEW-T interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-T interface card. Figure 5-18 4GEW-T panel 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-55 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-55 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-18 1 STAT Green If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-56 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-56 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-18 a Qu ant ity 4 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface Description Cable Type The 4GEW-T interface card provides four 1000M electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE data traffic. 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interface Attributes Table 5-57 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-58 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-58 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-T Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 11 W 0.3 kg 5.4.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces. 4GEW-S stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l S: optical interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-S interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE optical interfaces work in 100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. The 4GEW-S interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-S interface card. Figure 5-19 4GEW-S panel 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-59 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-59 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel Number in Figure 5-19 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Off Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-60 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card. Name Description Table 5-60 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-19 a Qu ant ity 4 The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to transmit and receive GE service traffic. 1000BA SE-X optical interface Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-61 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 5-62 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-63 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-S interface card. Table 5-63 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-S Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 8 W 0.3 kg 5.5 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.5.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card) The 2BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides two ISDN S/T interfaces, which transmit voice service. The 2BST implements the ISDN BRI function and provides the bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel:
l B channel: provides 64 kbit/s bandwidth and transmits voice service. l D channel: is a signaling channel and provides 16 kbit/s bandwidth. l The total bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel is 144 kbit/s. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards The S/T interface on the 2BST provides a rate of 192 kbit/s, including 144 kbit/s for data transmission and 48 kbit/s for maintenance information transmission. Table 5-64 lists the number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST. Table 5-64 Number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST User Interface One S/T interface Two S/T interfaces Usage Scenario Data services Mode TE Feed Supported No Voice services NT
-40 V feed Card Name 1BST 2BST NOTE l TE: terminal equipment l NT: network termination 2BST cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-65 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-65 Slots of 2BST SIC and WSIC cards Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Card 2BST (SIC) 2BST (WSIC) Functions and Applications Functions The 2BST has the following functions:
l Provides two ISDN S/T interfaces for voice access. l Implements NT mode. The 2BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the line -40 V feed, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports NT mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications 2BST (SIC) is installed into the SIC slot of the AR2220-S. The 2BST (WSIC) is installed in a WSIC slot on the AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-20 shows the appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel. Figure 5-20 Appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the 2BST (WSIC). Figure 5-21 Appearance of the 2BST (WSIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-66 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-66 Buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel Number in Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green 2 3 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. Interfaces Table 5-67 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST. Name Quantity Description Table 5-67 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST Letter in Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21 a RJ45 2 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. Cable Type 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-68 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable Technical Specifications 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-69 describes the technical specifications of the 2BST. Table 5-69 Technical specifications of the 2BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 2BST (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2BST (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 16.8 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card The 4FXS1FXO is the voice module on the AR routers. It provides five RJ11 interfaces, including four POTS FXS interfaces and one POTS FXO interface. NOTE l An FXS interface is a simulated subscriber line interface and provides access to AT0 loop trunk of the analog phone, fax, and telephone exchange. l An FXO interface is a loop trunk interface and provides access to the telephone exchange by using regular subscriber lines. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4FXS1FXO works with the SRU to implement the voice call function. The first FXS interface works with an FXO interface to implement the power failure survival function. The 4FXS1FXO can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the 4FXS1FXO. Figure 5-22 Appearance of the 4FXS1FXO a 1 2 3 Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-70 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel. Table 5-70 Buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-22 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the FXO channel is being occupied by a call. Red Off Green 2 ACT (interface status indicator) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-22 Indicator Color Description ACT (interface status indicator) Green If the indicator is off, the FXO channel is idle. If the indicator is steady on, the FXS channel is being occupied by a call. If the indicator is off, the FXS channel is idle. 3 Interfaces Table 5-71 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-71 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO Letter in Figure 5-22 a Name Qua ntity Description Cable Type FXS (RJ11) FXO (RJ11) 4 1 The POTS voice FXS interface uses regular telephone lines. The POTS voice FXO interface uses regular telephone lines. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Interface Attributes Table 5-72 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Technical Specifications Table 5-73 describes the technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-73 Technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.78 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is a VoIP voice processing DIMM. Functions and Applications Functions The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module provides the voice over IP (VoIP) functions, including:
l Processes the dial tone. l Parses telephone numbers. l Generates interactive voice response (IVR) and voice signal. l Encodes, decodes, and converts voice. l Implements voice conferences and echo canceler (EC). l Processes IP packets. Applications The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is installed into the DSP DIMM of the main control board on the AR2220-S. CAUTION Only the DSP module supported by the product can be inserted into the DSP DIMM slot. The DDR3 memory board or unsupported DIMMs cannot be inserted; otherwise, the device may be damaged or does not function properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 5 Cards Table 5-74 shows the technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module. Table 5-74 Technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module Item Maximum power consumption Specification 2.89 W Weight 0.05 kg (0.11 lb) 5.6 xDSL Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. 5.6.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B are the ADSL2/ADSL2+ service access modules on the AR routers and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. NOTE l The ADSL-A/M supports both Annex A and Annex M. l The ADSL-B supports Annex B. Table 5-75 describes the comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M. Table 5-75 Comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M Card Name Annex A Usage Scenario Annex A is applied to ADSL over POTS and compatible with POTS services. Annex B Annex B is applied to ADSL over ISDN and compatible with ISDN services. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Card Name Annex M Usage Scenario Annex M expands the upstream frequency band of ADSL and provides a higher upstream transmission rate. G.992.3 and G.992.5 each define Annex M:
l Annex M defined in G.992.3 and Annex M defined in G.992.5 have the same upstream frequency band. l They have different downstream frequency bands:
The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.3 is 1104 kHz. The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.5 is 2208 kHz. Functions and Applications Functions The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B each provide 1-channel ADSL/ADSL2+ access, provide independent CPU and management interfaces, and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. The ADSL-A/M or ADSL-B consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l ADSL2+ module: implements ADSL2+ modulation and demodulation on CPEs. l SGMII upstream module: provides one SGMII upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides two types of working clocks for cards. Applications The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S. Panel and Interfaces NOTE The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-23 shows the appearance of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-23 Appearance of the ADSL-A/M 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-76 describes the buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel. Table 5-76 Buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-23 1 STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the DSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the DSL channel is not activated. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the DSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-77 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M. Table 5-77 Types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M Letter in Figure 5-23 a Name ADSL2+
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The ADSL-A/M provides one RJ11 interface, which supports regular telephone lines. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-78 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Technical Specifications Table 5-79 describes the technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B. Table 5-79 Technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 5.4 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.6.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card The 4G.SHDSL is the G.SHDSL service access module on the AR routers. G.Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (G.SHDSL) uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TCPAM), provides up to 5.696 Mbit/s symmetric data rates, and supports 2/3/4-pair binding. The transmission rate can automatically adapt according to the line length and conditions. G.SHDSL provides a longer transmission distance than ADSL. Functions and Applications Functions The 4G.SHDSL provides 4-channel G.SHDSL access and the independent CPU as well as management interfaces. The 4G.SHDSL consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l G.SHDSL module: processes G.SHDSL services on CPEs. l GE upstream module: provides one upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides three types of working clocks for cards. Applications The 4G.SHDSL can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL. Figure 5-24 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-80 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-80 Buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel Number in Figure 5-24 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 LINK Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the four DSL channels have been activated. If the indicator is off, the four DSL channels have not been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.25 seconds and blinks three times in the next 0.75 seconds, the DSL channel has been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.5 seconds and blinks twice in the next 0.5 seconds, the two DSL channels have been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.75 seconds and blinks in the next 0.25 seconds, the three DSL channels have been activated. ACT Yellow If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 3 Interfaces Table 5-81 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Name Table 5-81 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL Letter in Figure 5-24 a Description Qua ntity 1 Cable Type G.SHDSL
(RJ45) 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables or 6.5 Network Cable The 4G.SHDSL provides one RJ45 interface, which supports standard network cables. Interface Attributes Table 5-82 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end Standards compliance G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair Technical Specifications Table 5-83 describes the technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL. Table 5-83 Technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 8.2 W Weight 0.35 kg (0.78 lb) 5.6.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card) The 1PON card is the EPON/GPON auto-sensing module on the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE 1 port: There are two ports on the 1PON card, one of which is the backup port. Therefore, the 1PON card is also called the 1PON. The 1PON card functions as the ONU of the EPON/GPON system:
l Receives cells broadcast in TDM mode at a downlink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 2.488 Gbit/s (GPON). l Supports burst transmission in TDMA mode at an uplink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 1.244 Gbit/s (GPON). Functions and Applications Functions The 1PON card works with the main control board and supports two PON SFP uplink interfaces. The 1PON card has the following functions:
l Supports OLT clock synchronization but not the 1588 function. l Supports EPON/GPON but not GE. l Supports the DyingGasp function. l Supports rogue ONT detection and isolation. l Detects the receiving optical power. l Supports delayed reset. Applications The 1PON card is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-25 shows the appearance of the 1PON panel. Figure 5-25 Appearance of the 1PON panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-84 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-84 Buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel Number in Figure 5-25 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 and 3 PON interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator indicates whether the PON card is requesting data transmission. l The AUTH indicator indicates the authentication status. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are steady on, the 1PON card is registered successfully. If the LINK indicator is steady on and the AUTH indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card is being registered. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator blink once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card keeps requesting data transmission. When this occurs, the 1PON card is a rogue ONU. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are off, the 1PON card does not request data transmission. Interfaces Table 5-85 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card. Table 5-85 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card Letter in Figure 5-25 a Qua ntity 2 Description Name PON interface The 1PON card provides EPON/GPON interfaces that are connected using SC/PC fibers. Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-86 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Receivin g end Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Input wavelength range 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C Technical Specifications Table 5-87 describes the technical specifications of the 1PON card. Table 5-87 Technical specifications of the 1PON card Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm 8.72 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Weight Specification 0.3 kg 5.6.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card) The VDSL interface card provides an interface for VDSL2 access. Functions and Applications Functions The VDSL interface card is used for packet switching and device management. It supports the following functions:
l Works in VDSL2 mode that complies with ITU-T G.993.2 and supports profile 17a defined in G.993.2. l Rolls back to ADSL2+ mode that complies with G.992.5. l Supports temperature and power measurement. l Sends a dying gasp alarm in the case of a power failure. The VDSL interface card consists of the following modules:
l ADSL2/VDSL2 socket: implements ADSL2/VDSL2 modulation and demodulation on customer premises equipment (CPE). l Storage module: stores data and programs on the interface card. l GE uplink interface module: provides a GE uplink interface to receive and transmit data. The SRU manages the interface through this GE interface. l Temperature and power module: measures temperature and power on the interface card. l Clock resetting module: provides signals to reset the system clock. Applications The VDSL interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of the VDSL interface card. Figure 5-26 VDSL panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-88 describes the buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel. 5 Cards Table 5-88 Buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel Number in Figure 5-26 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s
(0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the VDSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the VDSL channel has not been activated. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the VDSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-89 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-89 Types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card Letter in Figure 5-26 a Name VDSL2
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The VDSL interface card provides an RJ11 interface, which connects to a DSLAM through a telephone cable. Interface Attributes Table 5-90 VDSL interface attributes Item Connector Standards compliance Rate Description RJ11 VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Technical Specifications Table 5-91 describes the technical specifications of the VDSL interface card. Table 5-91 Technical specifications of the VDSL interface card Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Parameter Maximum power consumption Description 7.6 W Weight 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6 Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the cables used by the AR routers, including the structures and technical specifications of the cables. 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. 6.2 DC Power Cables A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. 6.6 Optical Fiber An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. 6.13 3G Antenna A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. Application Appearance An AC power cable connects the following:
l The AC input power jack on the chassis l The other end is connected to the AC power supply Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the AC power cable. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the AC power cable Specifications NOTE The AC power cables used in different countries and regions may have different specifications. The following are the specifications of the international standard AC power cable. Table 6-1 lists the specifications of the AC power cable. Table 6-1 Specifications of the AC power cable Item Cable type Function Description External power cable 250 V AC/10 A complying with international standard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable type Description PI-straight-male C13-straight-female l 227 IEC 53 (RVV)-300 V/500 V l Rated voltage: 300 V/500 V l Standards compliance: 227 IEC 53 (RVV) Conductor cross-sectional area 3 x 1.0 mm2 (3 x 0.00155 in.2) Fireproof level GB18380.1 6.2 DC Power Cables Applications A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. A DC power cable connects the following two interfaces:
l Input power jack on the chassis l Output power interface on an external power system NOTE A black -48 V DC power return wire (RTN) is connected to the RTN(+) end of the DC power supply. A blue -48 V DC power cable is connected to the NEG(-) end of the DC power supply. Appearance and Structure The black -48 V DC power return wire and the blue -48 V DC power cable are shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 6-2 -48 V DC power return wire 6 Cables Figure 6-3 -48 V DC power cable Specifications The technical specifications of a -48 V DC power return wire and a -48 V DC power cable are the same, as described in Table 6-2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-2 Specifications of the DC power cables Item Cable type Color Connector 1 Connector 2 Impedance Description Power cable Blue for -48 V DC power cable and black for -48 V DC power return wire OT Cord end terminal 4.95 /km Conductor cross-sectional area 1.2 mm2 (0.00186 in.2) 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. Application Appearance A ground cable connects the chassis to the ground. Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the ground cable. Figure 6-4 Appearance of the ground cable Specifications Table 6-3 lists the specifications of the ground cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-3 Specifications of the ground cable Item Cable type Color Description Power cable Green-yellow Connector type (X1/X2) OT/OT naked crimping terminal Gauge Cable type Maximum current Fireproof level 10 AWG (cross-sectional area 5.2 mm2
[0.0081 in.2]) l Standards compliance: H07Z-K UL3386 l Length: 0.3 m 50.0 A VW-1, CSA FT1 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. Application A console cable connects the console port of the device to the serial port of an operation terminal to transmit configuration data. A shielded cable or an unshielded cable can be used according to the onsite situation. A console cable connects the device and terminal as follows:
l The 8-pin RJ45 connector is inserted into the console port of the device. l The DB9 male connector is connected to an operation terminal, which is usually a PC. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-5 shows the structure of the console cable. Figure 6-5 Structure of the console cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.9 Pos.5 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.6 Pos.1 X1 X2 1 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-4 describes the pin assignments of the console cable. Table 6-4 Pin assignments of the console cable Connector Pin assignment X1(DB9) 2 3 5 X2(RJ45) 3 6 5 Specifications Table 6-5 lists the specifications of the console cable. Table 6-5 Specifications of the console cable Item Connector type Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Length Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-
pin, 8-bit, male Twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U 0.32 mm (0.13 in.) 28 AWG (cross-sectional area 0.08 mm2 [0.0002 in. 2]) 2 pairs 3 m (9.85 ft.) 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. Application A network cable connects a maintenance terminal to the console port on the main control board for local or remote maintenance. The network cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-6 describes the pin assignments of the straight-through cable. Table 6-6 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-7 describes the pin assignments of the crossover cable. Table 6-7 Pin assignments of the crossover cable Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 3 6 1 4 5 2 7 8 X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOTE To achieve the optimum electrical transmission performance, ensure that the wires connected to pins 1 and 2 and to pins 3 and 6 are twisted pairs. Specifications Table 6-8 lists the specifications of the network cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-8 Specifications of the network cable Item Connector type (X1/X2) Description RJ45 connectors Cable type Color Characteristic impedance Diameter Breakdown voltage Impedance Pin Frequency Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs
(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP) Dark gray 100.0 0.510 mm (0.02 in.) 500.0 V 93.8 8 pins 0 MHz to 100 MHz Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz Fireproof level Length CM l Straight through cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.), 10 meters
(32.8 ft.), 20 meters (65.6 ft.), and 30 meters (98.5 ft.) l Crossover cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.) and 30 meters
(98.5 ft.) 6.6 Optical Fiber Application An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. An optical fiber carries optical signals and transmits them over short distance. An optical fiber connects the following:
l The optical interface on a board l The optical distribution frame (ODF) or the optical interface on another device Table 6-9 lists the classification of optical fibers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-9 Optical fiber classification No. Purpose Local End Connector LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to the ODF To connect LPUs of two devices LC/PC Remote End Connector FC/PC LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to another device LC/PC SC/PC or LC/
PC 1 2 3 Mode Single mode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Appearance The appearances of the single-mode optical fiber and the multimode optical fiber are the same, but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is orange. CAUTION When connecting or removing the LC/PC optical connector, align the connector with the optical interface, and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following points:
l Align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and insert the optical fiber into the interface gently. l To remove the fiber, press the latch on the connector and pull the fiber out. Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearances of the single mode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-8 Single mode fiber with LC/PC connectors Figure 6-9 Single mode fiber with SC/PC connectors Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the multimode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-10 Multimode fiber with LC/PC connectors Pin Assignments Table 6-10 describes the pin assignments of the optical fiber. Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the optical fiber Local End Terminal Signal Direction
->
Remote End Terminal Optical interface Rx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Rx terminal
<-
Fiber Selection Criterion Table 6-11 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 6-12 lists common optical connectors. Table 6-11 Fiber selection criterion Parameter Length Criterion Onsite survey result Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Parameter Single mode or multimode Criterion Optical module type l The optical transmitting module of the multitransverse mode is connected to the multimode fiber. l The optical transmitting module of the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode is connected to the single mode fiber. NOTE If the optical fiber jumper is used, the connector connected to the device must be the LC/PC connector, and the connector connected to the remote end must be of the same type as the remote end interface. Connector shape l Cube: SC/PC, LC/PC, and MTRJ/PC l Column: ST/PC and FC/PC Table 6-12 Common optical connectors SC/PC optical connector LC/PC optical connector FC/PC optical connector MTRJ/PC optical connector
-
ST/PC optical connector 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Introduction E1 trunk cables are classified into 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cables and 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cables. The connectors of the cables are as follows:
l 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (DB9 to BNC):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides two BNC connectors. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable (DB9 to RJ45):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides an RJ45 connector. A T1 trunk cable is a 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Its appearance is the same as the appearance of an E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-11 shows the appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-11 Appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-12 Appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-13 shows the structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-13 Structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Label 1 Pos.6 Pos.1 Main Label BNC connector Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 X2 X3 Label 2 BNC connector Figure 6-14 shows the structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-14 Structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.6 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) X2 1 8 Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 Pin Assignments Table 6-13 describes the pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Table 6-13 Pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 BNC Connector X2 2 6 7 X3 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-14 describes the pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 X2 (RJ45) 4 2 6 7 5 1 2 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Blue Blue E1/T1 Trunk Cable Extension NOTE The E1/T1 trunk cable is 3 m long. If the connection distance is long, a cable extension is required. l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: BNC to BNC (The two connectors are BNC 75 angle male-II.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: RJ45 to RJ45 (The two connectors are RJ45.) The E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1 trunk cable extension is not used, the BNC connector is connected to the remote device. l If the E1 trunk cable extension is used, the BNC connector is connected to a coaxial connector, and the coaxial connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-15. CAUTION The Tx end of the E1 trunk cable is connected to the Rx end of the remote device, and the Rx end is connected to the Tx end. Figure 6-15 E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r BNC BNC DDN E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Coaxial connector E1 75-ohm cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables The E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is not used, the RJ45 connector is connected to the RJ45 interface of the remote device. l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is used, the RJ45 connector is connected to a network interface connector, and the network interface connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r RJ45 RJ45 DDN E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair Network interface connector Specifications E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm cable extension Table 6-15 lists the specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Table 6-15 Specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 75 ohm l E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 120 ohm l T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 100 ohm l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: coaxial cable l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: balanced twisted pair cable l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: PANTONE WARM GREY 1U l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: PANTONE 430U l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 0.254 mm
(0.01 in.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Cores Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 30 AWG l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 26 AWG l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable:
SYFVZP-75-1-1*4 l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: SEYVP-120 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. Introduction A synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable is connected as follows:
l The DB28 connector is connected to the DB28 port on a card. l Another end depends on the connected device:
If the wide area network (WAN) uses the DDN line, the cable is connected to the CSU/
DSU. If the WAN uses the dial-up line, the cable is connected to the modem. Cable Category CAUTION Verify that devices are connected using appropriate synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Appropriate cable type is determined based on device connection mode (such as synchronous/asynchronous and DTE/DCE modes), signals used by the connected device, baud rate, and clock. Table 6-16 lists the categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Table 6-16 Categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables Cable V.24 DTE cable V.24 DCE cable V.35 DTE cable Local End Connector DB28 connector Network-side Connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector DB28 (male) connector Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Cable V.35 DCE cable X.21 DTE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Local End Connector Network-side Connector DB28 (female) connector DB15 (male) connector DB28 (male) connector DB28 (female) connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector Appearance Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the V.24 DTE cable. Figure 6-17 Appearance of the V.24 DTE cable Figure 6-18 shows the appearance of the V.24 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-18 Appearance of the V.24 DCE cable Figure 6-19 shows the appearance of the V.35 DTE cable. Figure 6-19 Appearance of the V.35 DTE cable Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the V.35 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-20 Appearance of the V.35 DCE cable Figure 6-21 shows the appearance of the X.21 DTE cable. Figure 6-21 Appearance of the X.21 DTE cable Figure 6-22 shows the appearance of the RS449 DTE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-22 Appearance of the RS449 DTE cable Figure 6-23 shows the appearance of the RS449 DCE cable. Figure 6-23 Appearance of the RS449 DCE cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-24 shows the appearance of the RS530 DTE cable. Figure 6-24 Appearance of the RS530 DTE cable Figure 6-25 shows the appearance of the RS530 DCE cable. Figure 6-25 Appearance of the RS530 DCE cable Specifications Table 6-17 lists the specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-17 Specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable Item Characteristic impedance Description 100 ohm Cable type Transmission rate Color Diameter Gauge Pin Twisted pair l V.24: 1200 bit/s to 64 kbit/s l V.35/X.21/RS449/RS530: 1200 bit/s to 2.048 Mbit/
s Dark blue (PANTONE 296U) l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, and X. 21 DTE cable: 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
0.32 mm (0.013 in.) 28 AWG l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, X.21 DTE cable: 5 pairs + 8 pins l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
26 pins 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Introduction The connectors of a 4G.SHDSL cable are as follows:
l Four RJ11 connectors on the local end l An RJ45 connector on the network side Appearance and Structure Figure 6-26 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-26 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable Figure 6-27 shows the structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Figure 6-27 Structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Main Label 1 8 X1 Pin Assignments 6-pin connector Label 1 6 1 X2 Label 2 X3 Label 3 X4 Label 4 X5 Table 6-18 describes the pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-18 Pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (RJ45) 1 (LINE1 A) X2/X3/X4/X5 (RJ11) Tip Color 2.3 White and orange 2 (LINE1 B) 3 (LINE2 A) 6 (LINE2 B) 4 (LINE0 A) 5 (LINE0 B) 7 (LINE3 A) 8 (LINE3 B) 2.4 3.3 3.4 4.3 4.4 5.3 5.4 Orange White and Green Green White and Blue Blue White and brown Brown Specifications NOTE As shown in Table 6-18, the 4G.SHDSL cable uses standard pin assignments. A cable has four ports, each of them has two lines (A/B). The two lines in a port can be assigned in any sequence, but the line pairs must be assigned in certain sequence. Table 6-19 lists the specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Table 6-19 Specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable Item Description 100 ohm Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) 24 AWG 8 pins 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. Introduction ISDN-ST cables are classified into the following types:
Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-29 Appearance of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Figure 6-30 shows the structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Figure 6-30 Structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) X1 1 8 Pin Assignments 1 8 X2 Table 6-20 describes the pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable. Pins 3 and 6 are the sending end, and pins 4 and 5 are the receiving end. Table 6-20 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable RJ45 1 Signal
-
RJ45 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-21 describes the pin assignments of the ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Pins 4 and 5 are the sending end, and pins 3 and 6 are the receiving end. Table 6-21 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface crossover cable RJ45 (TE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 (NT) 1 2 4 3 6 5 7 8 Technical Specifications Table 6-22 lists the technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable. Table 6-22 Technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable Item Characteristic impedance Specification 100 ohm Cable Color Diameter Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Impedance Pin Specification 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 pins 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. Introduction Appearance The regular telephone line is connected as follows:
l The RJ11 connector is connected to a device such as a phone and fax machine. l Another RJ11 connector is connected to the voice card of the AR1200-S. Figure 6-31 shows the appearance of the regular telephone line. Figure 6-31 Appearance of the regular telephone line 6PIN-RJ11 6PIN-RJ11 1 6 X1 Pin Assignment 6 1 X2 Table 6-23 provides the pin assignment of a regular telephone line. Table 6-23 Pin assignment of a regular telephone line X1 Pin 3 4 Wire Color Red Green X2 Pin 3 4 Remarks Tip(+) Ring(-) Specifications Table 6-24 lists the specifications of the regular telephone line. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-24 Specifications of the regular telephone line Item Dielectric strength Description 150 V Maximum current Impedance Cable type Color Gauge Pin 1 A 237.25 ohm UL20251 White 28 AWG 2 pins 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. Introduction An 8AS cable connects the console port on an 8AS interface card to the serial port of an operation terminal. You can use shield cables or unshielded cables as required in different scenarios. The common usage scenarios of 8AS cables are:
l To connect an 8AS interface card to automatic teller machines in a bank, use shield straight-
through cables. You can buy shield straight-through cables from Huawei or made these cables onsite. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a dumb terminal, use a transit cable and a shield straight-through cable. A transit cable has an RJ45 plug on one end and an RJ45 socket on the other end. The transit cable converts the pin assignments on the dumb terminal to the standard pin assignments, which are the same as those on the straight-through cable. Then the straight-through cable can connect to the dumb terminal. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a serial port device, such as a PC or modem, use an asynchronous serial cable and a transit cable. One end of an asynchronous serial cable is an RJ45 socket, and the other end has a DB25 plug and a DB9 plug. The asynchronous serial cable connects to the PC or modem through the transit cable. NOTE Huawei can customize 8AS cables of specified length. Straight-through cable Figure 6-32 shows the appearance of a straight-through cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 Pin (8AS) 5 6 7 8 X2 Pin (Console) 3 6 1 8 Table 6-8 lists the technical specifications of a straight-through cable. Transit Cable Figure 6-34 shows the appearance of a transit cable. Figure 6-34 Transit cable appearance Figure 6-35 shows the structure of a transit cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-35 Transit cable structure Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) 1 8 X2 X1 1 8 Table 6-26 lists the pin assignments of a transit cable. Table 6-26 Pin assignments of a transit cable X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X2 4 2 7 5 6 3 8 1 Table 6-27 lists the specifications of a transit cable. Table 6-27 Specifications of a transit cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Description 100 ohm Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U Core diameter of the inner conductor Wire gauge of the inner conductor DC resistance of the inner conductor Number of pins 0.51 mm 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Asynchronous Serial Cable 6 Cables Figure 6-36 shows the appearance of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-36 Appearance of an asynchronous serial cable Figure 6-37 shows the structure of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-37 Structure of an asynchronous serial cable D-type connector
(25-pin, male) Pos.14 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.25 Pos.13 X1 X2 1 8 Pos.6 Pos.1 Pos.5 X3 Pos.9 D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Table 6-28 lists the pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-28 Pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable X1 4 X2 1 X3 7 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 20 2 8 7 3 6 5 X2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X3 4 3 1 5 2 6 8 Table 6-29 lists the specifications an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-29 Specifications of an asynchronous serial cable Item Connector Cable type Color Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 25-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-pin, 8-bit l Connector X3: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male Symmetrical twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.32 mm Wire gauge of the inner conductor 28 AWG (cross-sectional area approximately equal to 0.08 mm2) Number of pins Length 6.13 3G Antenna 2 pairs 3 m A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Introduction The antenna interfaces on a 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can connect to whip antennas and indoor remote antennas. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l Whip antennas are directly installed on an AR router and are recommended when a router is desk installed or wall mounted. l Indoor remote antennas have a 3 m long feed line and can use two 6 m feed lines to expand the length to 15 m. Indoor remote antennas are recommended when an AR router is installed in a cabinet or rack. (Indoor remote antennas need to be ordered separately if needed.) Whip Antenna Figure 6-38 shows the appearance of a whip antenna. Figure 6-38 Whip antenna Table 6-30 lists the technical specifications of a whip antenna. Table 6-30 Technical specifications of a whip antenna Item Connector Color Characteristic impedance Length Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Description SMA-J Black 50 ohm 150 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 10 W
-40C to +70C Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Relative humidity Gain Description 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1d Bi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 3 Remote Antenna Figure 6-39 shows the appearance of a remote antenna. Figure 6-39 Remote antenna Table 6-31 lists the technical specifications of a remote antenna. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-31 Technical specifications of a remote antenna Item Connector Description SMA-Male Color Characteristic impedance Height Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Gain Black 50 ohm 260 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 50 W
-40C to +90C l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1 dBi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2.5 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 2.5 Attenuation
< 0.3 dB on each meter of feed line (within the working frequency band) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7 List of Indicators About This Chapter This chapter describes the status and meanings of indicators on the AR routers, including indicators on the front and rear panels, cards, fan modules, and power supply units. 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200-S panel. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220-S panel. 7.3 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200-S panel. NOTE The indicators on the AR1220W-S and AR1220-S front panels are the same. The AR1220W-S is used as an example to describe the indicators. Figure 7-1 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel. Figure 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel 3 4 1 2 5 6 Table 7-1 describes the indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel. Table 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 1 SYS Green Red Off Green 2 WAN If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, at least one GE interface has been connected or activated. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 3 ACT Red and green If the indicator is off, neither GE interface is connected or activated. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. 4 5 6 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. WLAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the link has been connected or activated. If the indicator blinks (20 Hz), the link is transmitting data. If the traffic volume of transmitted data increases, the indicator blinks faster. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected or activated. WLAN The button enables and disables the WLAN function. Figure 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-2 Indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel 7 8 9 10 Table 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel. Table 7-2 Description of indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel Number in Figure 7-2 7 Indicator Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number in Figure 7-2 9 and 10 Indicator Color Description Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220-S panel. Figure 7-3 shows the indicators on the AR2220-S front panel. Figure 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220-S front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Table 7-3 describes the indicators on the AR2220-S front panel. Table 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220-S front panel Number in Figure 7-3 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 MiniSD card indicator Green Green Yellow Green Yellow SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. 7 ACT Red and green If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no MiniSD card. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. 9 Green EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. RST 10 CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. 7.3 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. HW-100-48AC14D Figure 7-4 shows the indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-4 Indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D Indicator Table 7-4 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. PWR150A Figure 7-5 shows the indicator of the PWR150A. Figure 7-5 Indicator of the PWR150A Indicator Table 7-5 Description of the PWR150A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the power supply unit functions properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description If the indicator blinks, the output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short-circuit. If the indicator is off, the input power is out of range, for example no AC input, overvoltage, and undervoltage, or the output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage and overtemperature. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8 List of Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the types and technical specifications of cards on the AR routers. 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 8-1 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R0 02C01 AR1220-
S WSIC SIC XSIC AR1220 W-S AR2220-
S Matching between SRUs and software versions voice card Table 8-2 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S SRU AR2220-S WLAN Subcard Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 8-3 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S 8FE1GE 24GE AR2220-S Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 8-4 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&Ver sion 1S A 2S A 2F E 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S ARV 200R 001C 01 ARV 200R 002C 00 ARV 200R 002C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 8-5 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module ARV200R0 01C01 AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S ARV200R0 02C00&AR V200R002 C01 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 8-6 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 1C01 ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL AR122 0-S 1PON AR122 0W-S ARV2 00R00 2C00 AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S VDSL Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 2C01 AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Table 8-7 describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. The table describes the power consumption of the cards operating at 25C (80F). Table 8-7 Power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR1200-S Card Name Weight Maximum Power Consumption 12.036 W 2.28 W 3.01 W 7 W 7 W l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 8.9 W 12 W 16.8 W 12.78 W 5.4 W 8.2 W 8FE1GE 1GEC 2FE 1E1T1-M/
2E1T1-M 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-
F 1SA/2SA 8AS 1BST 2BST 4FXS1FXO ADSL-A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.35 kg (0.77 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9 List of Interface Attributes About This Chapter This section describes the interface attributes supported by the AR routers. 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 describes the attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 9-2 describes the attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces. Table 9-2 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. A GE optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-3 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 9-4 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Description
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Table 9-5 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Receivin g end Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Input wavelength range Description 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. A CPOS optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-6 and Table 9-7 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-6 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Network layer protocol IP Table 9-7 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Center wavelength Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Extinction ratio Description
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 describes the attributes of channelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-9 describes the attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-9 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Working mode Function Description Unchannelized E1 Backup Terminal access 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 describes the attributes of channelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-11 describes the attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-11 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-13 describes the attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-13 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 lists ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 9-15 describes the attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-15 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-16 describes the attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces on the 32FXS/16FXS. Table 9-16 Attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB68 Standards compliance IEEE 1284C Interface as a 36 contact connector Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Twisted pair DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-17 describes the attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXO. Table 9-17 Attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Telephone cable DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Bandwidth Description 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. Table 9-18 describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces. Table 9-18 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Table 9-19 describes the attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-19 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 lists the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Data equipment type Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 9-21 lists the attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface. Table 9-21 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Item Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode Description MiniUSB-B, angle USB1.0 Device 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. Table 9-22 lists the attributes of the USB-A interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-22 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 lists the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 lists attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 VDSL interface attributes Item Description RJ11 Connector Standards compliance Rate VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
1 2 | User manual III | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Issue Date 03 2012-04-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document About This Document Intended Audience This document provides an overall description of the AR routers, details about each chassis and board, cables available to the device, and lists of components. This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers l Hardware installation engineers l Commissioning engineers l On-site maintenance engineers l System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DANGERWARNINGCAUTIONTIPNOTE Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Based on issue 02 (2012-03-19), this issue has the following updates:
l 3G-HSPA+7 sub card l 4GEW-T sub card l 4GEW-S sub card l VDSL sub card l AR1220L Changes in Issue 02 (2012-03-19) Based on issue 01 (2011-12-30), this issue has the following updates:
l The AR1220 DC model is added. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-12-30) Initial commercial release. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Version Matching..........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions..............................................................................................5 2 Chassis...........................................................................................................................................15 2.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................16 2.2 Naming Convention..........................................................................................................................................17 2.3 Device Structure...............................................................................................................................................18 2.3.1 AR1200 Series.........................................................................................................................................18 2.3.2 AR2200 Series.........................................................................................................................................22 2.3.3 AR3200 Series.........................................................................................................................................25 2.4 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................28 2.5 Physical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................28 3 Power Supply Units....................................................................................................................30 3.1 Power Supply Configuration............................................................................................................................31 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts..........................................................................................................32 3.2.1 Single DC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................................32 3.2.2 Two DC Power Supply Units..................................................................................................................32 3.2.3 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................33 3.2.4 Two Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units..................................................................................................33 3.2.5 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit......................................................................................34 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D..........................................................................................................................................35 3.4 PWR350A.........................................................................................................................................................38 3.5 PWR350D.........................................................................................................................................................41 4 Heat Dissipation System............................................................................................................44 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process..................................................................................................................................45 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module........................................................................................................................................46 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module........................................................................................................................................48 5 Cards..............................................................................................................................................51 5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................52 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards..................................................................................................................52 5.1.2 Interface Numbering................................................................................................................................54 5.1.3 Card Dimensions.....................................................................................................................................55 5.2 SRU..................................................................................................................................................................56 5.2.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................56 5.2.2 Panel and Interfaces.................................................................................................................................57 5.2.3 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................62 5.3 WLAN Subcard................................................................................................................................................62 5.3.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................62 5.3.2 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................63 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card............................................................................................................................63 5.4.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card.............63 5.4.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card............................................................67 5.5 WAN Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................69 5.5.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card)....................................................................................69 5.5.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card.......................................................................................................74 5.5.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card................76 5.5.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card)..............................81 5.5.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card..................................................84 5.5.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card)..................................................................................88 5.5.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card)......................................................................................90 5.5.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card).......................................................................93 5.5.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card).................................................................................................96 5.5.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card).......................................................................101 5.5.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card............................................................................103 5.6 Voice Interface Card.......................................................................................................................................107 5.6.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card)....................................................................................107 5.6.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card...........................................................111 5.6.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module.....................................................................................................114 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card............................................................................................................................115 5.7.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card......................115 5.7.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card...........................................................119 5.7.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card).....................................................................121 5.7.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card)....................................................................125 6 Cables...........................................................................................................................................129 6.1 AC Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................131 6.2 DC Power Cables............................................................................................................................................132 6.3 Ground Cable..................................................................................................................................................134 6.4 Console Cable.................................................................................................................................................135 6.5 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................136 6.6 Optical Fiber...................................................................................................................................................139 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables........................................................................................................................................143 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables......................................................................................148 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables..........................................................................................................................................154 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables...........................................................................................................................................156 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines..............................................................................................................................160 6.12 8AS Cable.....................................................................................................................................................161 6.13 3G Antenna...................................................................................................................................................166 7 List of Indicators........................................................................................................................170 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel.....................................................................................................................171 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel.....................................................................................................................174 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel.....................................................................................................................176 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel.....................................................................................................................177 7.5 Fan Module Indicators....................................................................................................................................177 7.6 Power Indicators.............................................................................................................................................178 7.7 SRU Indicators...............................................................................................................................................182 8 List of Cards................................................................................................................................185 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR............................................................................................................................186 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight....................................................................................................................195 9 List of Interface Attributes.......................................................................................................197 9.1 Electrical Interfaces........................................................................................................................................199 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes.............................................................................................................200 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes..............................................................................................................................202 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................203 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................204 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes.................................................................................205 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................206 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................206 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes..........................................................................................208 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface...............................................................................................................209 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface....................................................................................................................209 9.12 3G Interface Attributes.................................................................................................................................210 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes............................................................................................................................211 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1 Version Matching About This Chapter This section describes the matching relationships between the chassis, power supplies, cards, and system software versions of AR routers. NOTE l AR version roadmap: ARV200R001C00, ARV200R001C01, ARV200R002C00, ARV200R002C01. l Unless otherwise specified, if a power supply or card is supported by version A, it is also supported by all versions later than version A. 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. Table 1-1 Matching between product models and software versions Model Software Version ARV200R0 01C00 ARV200R0 01C01 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1200 series AR2200 series AR3200 series ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R0 02C01 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Table 1-2 Matching between power supplies and software versions Model&Version PW R150 A 3.4 PWR 350A 3.3 HW-
100-4 8AC1 4D 54 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 54 W DC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 60 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 1 Version Matching 3.5 PWR3 50D 150 W DC Powe r Supp ly Unit ARV20 0R001C 00 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220V W AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220V W AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V ARV20 0R001C 01 ARV20 0R002C 00 ARV20 0R002C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 54 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k AR1220W AR1220V W AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 54 W DC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 60 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k PW R150 A 3.4 PWR 350A 3.3 HW-
100-4 8AC1 4D 1 Version Matching 3.5 PWR3 50D 150 W DC Powe r Supp ly Unit Table 1-3 Matching between power modes and software versions Model&Version Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit ARV 200R 001C 00 ARV 200R 001C 01 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW Dual Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV 200R 002C 00 ARV 200R 002C 01 Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Dual Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 1-4 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C 00 AR1220 WSIC SIC XSIC AR1220 V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001C 01&ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R002C 01 voice card Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 1-5 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001 C00 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001 C01&ARV20 0R002C00 ARV200R002 C01 SRU WLAN Subcard Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 1-6 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 0 8FE1GE 24GE AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version 8FE1GE 24GE ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00 ARV200R002C0 1 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 1-7 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&
8 Version A S 1S A 2S A 2F E 1 G E C 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0 AR V20 0R0 01C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 01C 01 A R1 22 0V A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 02C 00 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R1 22 0L A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 1-8 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200 R001C00 ARV200 R001C01 ARV200 R002C00 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 1 Version Matching 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR122 0L AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 ARV200 R002C01 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 1-9 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR1220 V AR1220 AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL AR1220 Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 01 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR V20 0R0 02C 00 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2 Chassis About This Chapter This section describes the characteristics, naming rules, appearance, structure, system performance, and technical specifications of the AR routers. 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.4 System Configuration 2.5 Physical Specifications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. Description Models Huawei AR Enterprise Router (AR router for short) are the next-generation routers integrating data,voice, security, routing, switching, and virtual private network (VPN) functions. As an egress gateway for enterprises, the AR routers use the multi-core CPU processing capabilities and rapid expansibility. The AR routers offer the following models. Model AR1200 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW Characteristics The AR1220 is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]), uses a 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack, and supports two SIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 8FE interfaces and fixed 2GE electrical interfaces. NOTE l AR V200R001C00 uses the 54 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions use the 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220V supports 32-channel voice and the PoE power supply unit can be installed on it. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220V chassis is AR1220V and a PoE power supply port is provided. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220W supports the Wi-Fi function and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220W chassis is AR1220W and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220VW supports 32-
channel voice, Wi-Fi, and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220VW chassis is AR1220VW and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Model AR2200 AR2220 AR2240 AR3200 AR3260 Characteristics The AR2220 is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm), uses a 150 W power supply unit, and supports four SIC cards and two WSIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 3GE interfaces (including one combo interface). The backplane is in the middle of the chassis, and cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. The AR2240 is 2 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]) and uses a 350 W pluggable power supply unit. The AR2240 has a backplane, front subcards, and rear subcards. The pluggable fan module uses front-
access design. The AR2240 supports four SIC cards, two WSIC cards, and two XSIC cards. The AR3260 is 3 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]) and uses a 350 W pluggable power supply unit. The AR3260 has a backplane, front subcards, and rear subcards. The pluggable fan module uses front-
access design. The AR3260 supports four SIC cards, two WSIC cards, and four XSIC cards. NOTE l SIC: Service Interface Card. This is the smallest card supported by ARs. l WSIC: Wide SIC. The same height as a SIC, but twice the width. l XSIC: Extended SIC. Double the height and width of an XSIC and twice those of a SIC. l EXSIC: Extra-Extended SIC. Twice the height of a SIC, and four times the width of a SIC. NOTE In this document, AR1200 indicates AR1220, AR1220V, AR1220W, and AR1220VW. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. Figure 2-1 Naming convention ARB1 B2 B3 B4C1-D1 Example:
AR1220 V Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Table 2-1 Naming convention of AR routers Field B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 D1 Description Product series code. AR routers includes series 1, 2 and 3. Fixed as 2, indicating enterprise router. Number of service card slots (dependent on B1):
l When B1 is 1, B3 indicates the number of SIC cards. l When B1 is 2 or 3, B3 indicates the number of WSIC and XSIC cards. The value is fixed as 0. C1 contains one or two upper-case letters. l W: WLAN l V: voice l A: AC (This is the default configuration, so A is not contained in the product name) l D: DC 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.3.1 AR1200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR1200. Appearance NOTE AR1220 has two models: AC model and DC model. The two models are identical in the front panels, but different in the power supply units at the rear of the chassis. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show front views of AR1200. Figure 2-2 AR1220, AR1220L and AR1220V front view 18 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-3 AR1220W and AR1220VW front view 19 18 20 Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9 show rear views of AR1200. Figure 2-4 AR1220 AC model rear view 7 2 15 14 13 Figure 2-5 AR1220 DC model rear view 7 2 1 1 12 10 4 3 21 3 15 14 13 12 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-6 AR1220V rear view 7 2 1 2 Chassis 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 2-7 AR1220W rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 2-8 AR1220VW rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-9 AR1220L rear view 7 2 1 2 Chassis 4 3 15 14 13 10 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 7: Security lock 10: AC power switch 11: PoE port 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 12: Fixed 8FE interface on the panel 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. 19: Antenna 20: WLAN switch 21: DC power jack Slot Distribution Figure 2-10 shows slot distribution on AR1200. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Figure 2-10 AR1200 slot distribution Device Model Front view AR1200 Slot Distribution Slot Combination NA NA Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 0(SRU) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 2(WSIC) 0(SRU) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis As shown in Figure 2-10, the slots of AR1200 can be combined :
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. 2.3.2 AR2200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR2200. Appearance Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12 show front views of AR2200. Figure 2-11 AR2220 front view 10 4 16 17 13 18 14 15 Figure 2-12 AR2240 front view 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14 show rear views of AR2200. Figure 2-13 AR2220 rear view 23 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-14 AR2240 rear view 2 3 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 6: Pluggable AC power supply unit 8: Pluggable fan module 9: SRU 10: AC power switch 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 16: Micro SD card interface 17: GE optical/
electrical Combo interface 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. NOTE The two power supply units of the AR2240 work in load balancing mode. Slot Distribution Figure 2-15 shows slot distribution on AR2200. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. l In AR V200R002C00, a WSIC card can be inserted into an XSIC slot with a special component. The WSIC card is in the lower side of the slot and uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-15 AR2200 slot distribution 2 Chassis Device Model Front view AR2220 Rear view Slot Distribution Slot Combination 7(Power) 0(SRU) NA 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) Front view AR2240 10(Power) 9(Power) 11(SRU) F A N NA Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Rear view 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 7(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) As shown in Figure 2-15, the slots of AR2200 can be combined as follows:
l AR2220:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. l AR2240:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. 2.3.3 AR3200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR3200. Appearance Figure 2-16 shows the front view of AR3260. Figure 2-16 AR3260 front view 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 Figure 2-17 shows the rear view of AR3260. Figure 2-17 AR3260 rear view 2 3 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 6: Pluggable AC power supply unit 8: Pluggable fan module 9: SRU 10: AC power switch NOTE The two power supply units of the AR3260 work in load balancing mode. Slot Distribution Figure 2-18 shows slot distribution on AR3260. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. l In AR V200R002C00 and later versions, a WSIC card can be inserted into an XSIC slot. The WSIC card is in the lower side of the slot and uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. l MFS: Multiple Function Slot. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-18 AR3200 slot distribution Device Model Slot Distribution AR3260 Front view 12(Power) 11(Power) 14(MFS) 13(MFS) 15(SRU) F A N Slot Combination Insert the SRU into slot 15. Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 7(XSIC) 9(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) 10(EXSIC) As shown in Figure 2-18, the slots of AR3260 can be combined as follows:
l AR3260:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. Slot 9 and slot 10 are combined into new slot 10. Slot 13 and slot 14 are combined into new slot 14, which is reserved for the slave main control board. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.4 System Configuration Table 2-2 System configuration Model Processor AR1200 Series AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 2-core: 500 MHz 4-core: 600 MHz 8-core: 600 MHz 12-core: 750 MHz Memory 512 MB 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB Flash Memory 256 MB Micro SD Card 0 16 MB 2 GB 16 MB 2 GB 16 MB 2 GB 2.5 Physical Specifications Table 2-3 Physical specifications Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Description l Without rack-mounting ear:
AR1200: 390.0 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(15.35 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220: 442.0 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(17.4 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2240: 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm x 88.1 mm
(17.4 in. x 18.5 in. x 3.47 in.) AR3260: 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm x 130.5 mm (17.4 in. x 18.5 in. x 5.14 in.) l With rack-mounting ear:
AR1200: 482.6 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(19 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220: 482.6 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(19 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2240: 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm x 88.1 mm
(19 in. x 18.5 in. x 3.47 in.) AR3260: 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm x 130.5 mm (19 in. x 18.5 in. x 5.14 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Item Maximum power consumption Full configuration Empty chassis Weight Full configuration Empty chassis Operating temperature Relative humidity Altitude Long-term operating altitude Description l AR1200: 52 W l AR2220: 95 W l AR2240: 180 W l AR3260: 270 W l AR1200: 33.3 W l AR2220: 65.1 W l AR2240: 114.9 W l AR3260: 163.2 W l AR1200: 3.60 kg (7.94 lb) l AR2220: 8.45 kg (18.63 lb) l AR2240: 19.30 kg (42.56 lb) l AR3260: 25.65 kg (56.56 lb) l AR1200: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) l AR2220: 4.95 kg (10.91 lb) l AR2240: 8.85 kg (19.51 lb) l AR3260: 11.00 kg (24.26 lb) 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Storage altitude Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Rated voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz Maximum voltage 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63Hz AC input voltage Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3 Power Supply Units About This Chapter This section describes the power supply units supported by the AR routers. CAUTION l Power off the AR routers before removing or performing maintenance on the power supply units. l To power off the AR routers , power off all its power supply units. 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. 3.4 PWR350A This section describes the PWR350A power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. 3.5 PWR350D This section describes the PWR350D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. Table 3-1 describes the power supply units supported by each model. Maintenance Maintain together with the chassis. Table 3-1 Power supply units supported by each model Power Supply Unit Description 60 W AC power supply unit in an open rack NOTE AC power supply unit fixed in the chassis Installation Fixed in the chassis, does not need to be connected to the chassis using cables. l AR V200R001C00 uses the 54 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions use the 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D External PoE AC power supply unit PWR150A AC power supply unit 3.4 PWR350A AC power supply unit 150 W DC Power Supply DC power supply unit Maintain independently from the chassis. Maintain together with the chassis. Front-access design, removable. Maintain together with the chassis. Connected to the PoE port at the back of the chassis using its own power cable. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports two power supply units. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Power Supply Unit Description 3.5 PWR350D DC power supply unit 3 Power Supply Units Maintenance Front-access design, removable. Installation Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports two power supply units. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.2.1 Single DC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-1 shows the layout of single DC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-1 Layout of single DC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR NEG RTN 1. NEG: Power cable 2. RTN: Power ground cable 3. GND: Grounding After the DC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.2 Two DC Power Supply Units Figure 3-2 shows the layout of dual DC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-2 Layout of dual DC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR1 PWR2 NEG RTN NEG RTN 1. NEG: Power cable 2. RTN: Power ground cable 3. GND: Grounding After the DC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.3 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-3 shows the layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-3 Layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.4 Two Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 shows the layout of dual non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 Layout of dual non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR1 PWR2 L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.5 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-5 shows the layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-5 Layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard
-53V RTN PoE Port (FE4~FE7) 12V GND
-53V RTN Motherboard PSE on the SRU PWR PWR L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding 5. RTN: Power ground cable The non-PoE AC power supply unit and PoE AC power supply unit are independent of each other:
l Non-PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. l PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PoE module, the PoE module outputs -53 V voltage, and then the PSE on the SRU provides power for the powered devices (PDs) connected to the PoE interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-6 illustrates the naming convention of the HW-100-48AC14D. Figure 3-6 HW-100-48AC14D naming convention HW-100-48AC14D 1 2 3 4 5 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Product brand Output power parameters l 100: The output power is 100 W. l 48: The output voltage is 48 V. Power supply unit type l A (Alternate): AC/DC power supply unit l D (Direct): DC/DC power supply unit Socket type l C14 is a type of socket. D (Desk), indicating the desktop power supply. Functions The HW-100-48AC14D uses 90 V AC-264 V AC input power, and provide 48 V/100 W output power when no fan is used. Table 3-2 describes the protection functions provided by the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-2 Protection functions of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Minimu m Value
-
Typical Value
-
Maximu m Value 62 V Input protecti on Output protecti on Input undervolta ge protection Input undervolta ge recovery Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurrent protection Output short-
circuit protection
-
Overheating protection
-
-
51 V
-
-
80 V 58 V 2.5 A 3 A 3.5 A
-
-
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Hysteresis is not smaller than 5 V. Output voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output current can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. No smoke will be generated. Temperature is reduced below 55C (131F). Appearance Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-7 Appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D Table 3-3 describes meanings of the indicators. Table 3-3 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. Technical Specifications Table 3-4 describes the technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D. Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 72 mm x 171 mm x 40 mm (2.83 in. x 6.73 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight 0.65 kg (1.5 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Rated operating voltage Rated output current Rated output voltage Specification 100 V AC to 240 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC 2.08 A 48 V Output power 100 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 20% RH to 80% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) 3.4 PWR350A This section describes the PWR350A power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-8 illustrates the naming convention of the PWR350A. Figure 3-8 PWR350A naming convention PWR350A 1 2 3 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3) Power supply unit Output power parameters l 350: The output power is 350 W. Powering mode l A (Alternate): alternating current Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Functions The PWR350A uses 90 V AC-290 V AC input power, and provides 12 V/350 W output power. The PWR350A has a fan. Table 3-5 describes the protection functions of the PWR350A. Table 3-5 Protection functions of the PWR350A Item Typical Value
-
Minimu m Value
-
Input protectio n Input undervolta ge protection Output protectio n Input overvoltag e Input overcurren t protection Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurren t protection Output short-
circuit protection Overheating protection 305 V
-
14 V 120% x 29.2 A
-
75C
(167F)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Maximu m Value 75 V 325 V
-
16 V 150% x 29.2 A
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically, and hysteresis is 5 V or less. Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically, and hysteresis is 5 V or less. The AC input power lines
(L and N) have fuses.
-
-
Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. When temperature is restored to the normal range, the power supply unit restarts automatically. Appearance Figure 3-9 shows the appearance of the PWR350A. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-9 Appearance of the PWR350A 3 2 4 1 1. Handle 2. Switch 3. Indicator 4. AC jack Table 3-6 describes the meanings of the PWR350A indicators. Table 3-6 Description of the PWR350A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Red and green Description If the indicator is steady green, the input power is in the normal range. If the indicator blinks alternately between red and green, the output power is out of range, for example, when an overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit event occurs. In these events, the power supply unit goes into hiccup protection mode. Technical Specifications Table 3-7 describes the technical specifications of the PWR350A. Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the PWR350A Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 201.0 mm x 260.5 mm x 38.5 mm (7.91 in. x 10.26 in. x 1.52 in.) Weight 1.45 kg (3.2 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 290 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Input current Rated output voltage Output voltage range Specification 5 A 12 V DC 11.64 V DC to 12.36 V DC Output power 350 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude
-25C to 60C (-80F to 140F) 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) The operating temperature is significantly reduced when at altitudes between 3000 (9842.4 ft.)and 4000 m (13123.2 ft.). The operating temperature drops 1C (33.8F)for every 200 m (656.16 ft.)increase in altitude. 3.5 PWR350D This section describes the PWR350D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-10 illustrates the naming convention of the PWR350D. Figure 3-10 PWR350D naming convention PWR350D 1 2 3 Number Description
(1)
(2) Power supply unit Output power parameters l 350: The output power is 350 W. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units
(3) Powering mode l D (Direct): direct current Functions Appearance The PWR350D provides +12 V DC power. It has the following functions:
l EMC filtering, surge protection, and short circuit protection. l Various alarms, for example, the alarm triggered when there is no power input, the alarm for the air breaker status, the alarm for ineffective surge protection, and the alarm for undervoltage input. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of the PWR350D. Figure 3-11 Appearance of the PWR350D 1 2 3 4 1. Handle 2. Switch 3. Indicator 4. DC jack Table 3-8 describes the meanings of the PWR350D indicators. Table 3-8 Description of the PWR350D indicators Name STATUS Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit occurs. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-9 describes the technical specifications of the PWR350D. Table 3-9 Technical specifications of the PWR350D Item Dimensions
(width x depth x height) Specification 201.0 mm x 240.0 mm x 40.0 mm (7.91 in. x 9.45 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight Rated input voltage Input voltage range Rated output voltage 0.8 kg (1.77 lb)
-60 V DC to -48 V DC
-72 V DC to -38.4 V DC 12 V Output power 350 W Long-term operating temperature Humidity Altitude
-25C to 45C (-80F to 113F) 5% RH to 95% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) The operating temperature is significantly reduced when at altitudes between 3000 (9842.4)and 4000 m (13123.2 ft.). The operating temperature drops 1C (33.8F) for every 200 m (656.16 ft.) increase in altitude. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4 Heat Dissipation System About This Chapter This section describes the heat dissipation system of the AR router. The fan module of the AR router is described as follows:
l The fan module of the AR1200 and AR2220 is located on the right side in the chassis. The fan module dimensions of the AR1200 are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm [0.79 in.] (depth). The fan module dimensions of the AR2220 are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm [0.79 in.] (depth). l The fan module of the AR2240 is 2 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. l The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module The AR2240 fan module is 2 U high, pluggable and uses front-access design. 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. NOTE The heat dissipation system ensures that the AR routers operates at a normal temperature. For temperature requirements, see 2.5 Physical Specifications. Figure 4-1 shows air circulation through the AR1200 chassis. Figure 4-1 Air circulation through the AR1200 chassis Figure 4-2 shows air circulation through the AR2220 chassis. Figure 4-2 Air circulation through the AR2220 chassis Figure 4-3 shows air circulation through the AR2240 chassis. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Figure 4-3 Air circulation through the AR2240 chassis Figure 4-4 shows air circulation through the AR3260 chassis. Figure 4-4 Air circulation through the AR3260 chassis 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module The AR2240 fan module is 2 U high, pluggable and uses front-access design. Functions The fan module is located on the right side of the AR2240 chassis for heat dissipation and ventilation. If a single fan failed, the device will be overheated and its performance is then affected. When this occurs, replace the entire fan frame immediately. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Structure Panel The fan module of the AR2240 consists of a fan tray, five 12 V fans with dimensions 80 mm
[3.16 in.] (width) x 25 mm [0.99 in.] (depth), and a fan control board (FCB). Figure 4-5 shows the panel of the fan module. Figure 4-5 Fan module panel of the AR2240 Table 4-1 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. Technical Specifications Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the fan module on the AR2240. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the fan module Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 27.4 mm x 478.6 mm x 84.3 mm (1.08 in. x 18.85 in. x 3.32 in.) Weight 1.05 kg (2.32 lb) Maximum power consumption Maximum wind pressure Maximum wind rate 60 W 150 Pa 400 CFM Maximum noise 61 dB Operating voltage of a fan 7 V DC to 15 V DC 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. Functions Structure Panel The fan module is located on the right side of the AR3260 chassis for heat dissipation and ventilation. If a single fan failed, the heat dissipation for the AR3260 will be affected. When this occurs, replace the entire fan frame immediately. The fan module of the AR3260 consists of a fan tray, three 12 V fans with dimensions 120 mm
(width) x 25 mm (depth), and a fan control board (FCB). Figure 4-6 shows the panel of the fan module. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Figure 4-6 Fan module panel of the AR3260 Table 4-3 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. Technical Specifications Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the fan module on the AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the fan module Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 27.4 mm x 478.6 mm x 125.7 mm Weight Maximum power consumption Maximum wind pressure Maximum wind rate 1.45 kg 90 W 226 Pa 543 CFM Maximum noise 66.8 dB Operating voltage of a fan 7 V DC to 15 V DC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5 Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the cards supported by the AR routers. 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.2 SRU The SRU is the main control board on the AR2240 or AR3260 and is pluggable. 5.3 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.5 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.6 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards This section describes the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. Figure 5-1,Figure 5-2,Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 illustrates the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR2240, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR3260, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 Relationships between cards on the AR1200 SRU Fan Service card Service card Power Backplane Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-2 Relationships between cards on the AR2220 Backplane Service card Service card SRU Fan Power Figure 5-3 Relationships between cards on the AR2240 Backplane Service card Service card SRU Power Fan Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-4 Relationships between cards on the AR3260 SRU Power Fan Backplane Service card Service card 5.1.2 Interface Numbering This section describes the interface numbering scheme on the AR routers. On the AR routers, interfaces are numbered in the format of slot ID/subcard ID/interface sequence number. l Slot ID The slot ID specifies the ID of the slot where a card resides. The SRU of the AR1200 and 2220 is integrated with the chassis, so the slot ID is fixed as 0. When slots need to be combined into one slot, the greater slot ID is used as the new slot ID. For example, when slot 1 and slot 2 are combined, slot ID 2 is used as the new slot ID. l Subcard ID The subcard ID specifies the ID of a subcard. The cards of AR routers series routers do not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard ID of the AR routers is fixed as 0. l Interface sequence number The interface sequence number indicates the number of each interface on a card. There is only one row of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from left to right starting with 0. 0 1 2 3 There are two rows of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from bottom to top and left to right starting with 0. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 5.1.3 Card Dimensions This section explains the conventions for measuring cards and lists the dimensions of SIC, WSIC, XSIC and EXSIC card. Figure 5-5 illustrates the dimensions of a card. Figure 5-5 Card dimensions description Height Width Depth NOTE The card dimensions are defined as follows:
l Depth: the distance between the handle and the end of Printed Circuit Board (PCB) l Width: the longest distance between the tops of two handles l Height: the height of the ejector lever Figure 5-6 shows the cards supported by the AR routers and Table 5-1 lists the card dimensions. Figure 5-6 Card appearances SIC WSIC XSIC EXSIC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Table 5-1 Card dimensions Card Type SIC card WSIC card XSIC card EXSIC card SRU 5.2 SRU 5 Cards Dimensions (Depth x Width x Height) 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) 223.5 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58 in.) 270.85 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (10.67 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58 in.) The SRU is the main control board on the AR2240 or AR3260 and is pluggable. The SRUs are classified into SRU40 and SRU80. NOTE l AR V200R001C00: SRU40 can only be used on AR2240 and SRU80 can only be used on AR3260. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions: SRU40 and SRU80 can be used on both AR2240 and AR3260. Table 5-2 shows the comparison between the SRU40 and SRU80. Table 5-2 Comparison between the SRU40 and SRU80 Card Name SRU40 Performance 600 MHZ CPU with eight kernels Function Traffic management is not supported. SRU80 750 MHZ CPU with 12 kernels Traffic management is supported. 5.2.1 Functions and Applications Functions The SRU integrates the control and management functions and provides the control plane, management plane, and switching plane for the system. l Control plane: provides functions such as protocol processing, service processing, route calculation, forwarding control, service scheduling, traffic statistics, and system security. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Management plane: provides functions such as system monitoring, environment monitoring, log and alarm processing, system loading, and system upgrade. l Switching plane: provides high-speed and non-blocking data channels to implement service switching between service modules. The SRU consists of the following modules:
l Control module: functions as the control and management plane for the system, implementing protocol processing, route calculation, forwarding control, system management, and system security. l Switching module: functions as the service switching plane and provides high-speed service channels to implement service switching, including voice switching, data switching, and conversion between voice and data services. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides synchronous clock signals for voice cards and local voice switching. NOTE l The SRU stores configuration data, startup files, upgrade software, and logs. l The SRU is hot swappable. Applications The AR2240,AR3260 must have an SRU installed. The AR2240,AR3260 can operate with one SRU installed and with two SRUs installed in future. l When one SRU is installed, it can be inserted into the following slot:
Slot 11 of the AR2240 Slot 15 of the AR3260 For slot distribution on the AR2240, see Figure 2-15. For slot distribution on the AR3260, see Figure 2-18. 5.2.2 Panel and Interfaces NOTE The SRU40 and SRU80 panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-7 shows the appearance of the SRU. Figure 5-7 Appearance of the SRU 1 2 3 4 56 56 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 a b c d e f Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-3 describes the buttons and indicators on the SRU panel. 5 Cards Table 5-3 Buttons and indicators on the SRU panel Number 1 Indicator SYS Color Green Red Off Green ACT (active/
standby status indicator) Micro SD Green ACT (USB) Red and green 2 3 4 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is green, the SRU is in active state. If the indicator is off, the SRU is in standby state. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no micro SD card. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. Number 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 10 Indicator SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Color Green Yellow Green Yellow MiniUSB EN Green CON/AUX EN NOTE Green l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 11 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting cards manually. Resetting a card will cause service interruption; therefore, carefully verify the issue before you reset a card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interfaces Table 5-4 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the SRU. Table 5-4 Types and functions of interfaces on the SRU Letter in Figure 5-7 a Name Micro SD card Qua ntit y 2 2 2 1 2 b c d USB GE optical/
electrical Combo interface GE electrical interface e and f Console interface, including the MiniUSB and RJ45 interface Description Cable Type MiniSD card USB disk SFP optical module and 6.6 Optical Fiber 6.5 Network Cable MiniUSB cable and 6.4 Console Cable The micro SD card is used to store system data. l SD1: built-in, default setting l SD0: installed in a reserved SD card on the front panel, an external extended card The USB disk is used to deploy devices. The SFP interface is used to receive and send services. An Ethernet interface is connected to the network interface of a configuration terminal or network management workstation for on-site or remote configuration. An Ethernet interface is also used to receive and send services. A console interface is connected to the console for on-site configuration. The MiniUSB and RJ45 interface cannot be used simultaneously. By default, an RJ45 interface is connected to the console for on-
site configuration. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-5 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-6 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-7 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Data equipment type Description Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 5-8 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Description Item MiniUSB-B, angle Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode USB1.0 Device Table 5-9 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 5.2.3 Technical Specifications Table 5-10 describes the technical specifications of the SRU. Table 5-10 Technical specifications of the SRU Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 270.85 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (10.67 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58in.) Maximum power consumption 85.44 W Weight 2.1 kg (4.63 lb) 5.3 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.3.1 Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions l WLAN subcards provide Wi-Fi interfaces. Wi-Fi interfaces comply with IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, and 802.11b, and each of these interfaces provides a maximum of 300 Mbit/s transmission rate. l WLAN subcards provide a high wireless performance and reliability, and large coverage scope using the multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) technology. l WLAN subcards support 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, WPA/WPA2 encryption, and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK encryption to provide secure data transmission. Applications A WLAN subcard has a dedicated WLAN slot on the AR routers. 5.3.2 Technical Specifications Table 5-11 describes the technical specifications of the WLAN subcard. Table 5-11 Technical specifications of the WLAN subcard Item Maximum power consumption Specification 7.24 W 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.4.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/
L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 8FE1GE is the 8-port 100M+1-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 9-channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces and one GE electrical interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 100 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the eight FE interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l The eight FE interfaces work at 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. The GE interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 8FE1GE can be installed into the WSIC slots of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260. On the AR1200, two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot. AR1200 V200R001C00 does not support the 8FE1GE. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-8 shows the appearance of the 8FE1GE. Figure 5-8 Appearance of the 8FE1GE 1 2 3 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-12 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel. Table 5-12 Buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel Number in Figure 5-8 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-8 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description FE/GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-13 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE. Table 5-13 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE Name Quan tity Description Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable 8 1 10BASE-TX/
100BASE-
TX electrical interface 1000BASE-T electrical interface The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. The 8FE1GE provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. Letter in Figure 5-8 a b Interface Attributes Table 5-14 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Description IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Table 5-15 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-16 describes the technical specifications of the 8FE1GE. Table 5-16 Technical specifications of the 8FE1GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.036 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 24GE is the 24-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 24-
channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 1000 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the 24 GE interfaces. l These interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 24GE can be installed into the XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. On the AR2220, two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 24GE. Figure 5-9 Appearance of the 24GE 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-17 describes the buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-17 Buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-9 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected. Red Off Green LINK 2: indicators of interfaces in the second row 3: indicators of interfaces in the first row Interfaces Table 5-18 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE. Table 5-18 Types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE Letter in Figure 5-9 a Qua ntity 24 Name 1000BASE-
T electrical interface Description Cable Type The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE services. 6.5 Network Cable Interface Attributes Table 5-19 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Interface attribute Description MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-20 describes the technical specifications of the 24GE. Table 5-20 Technical specifications of the 24GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.50 mm x 201.00 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) Maximum power consumption 25 W Weight 0.85 kg (1.88 lb) 5.5 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.5.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card) 1GEC is a 1-port 1000M Ethernet optical and electrical Combo interface card (RJ45, SFP). Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 1GEC stands for:
l 1: one interface l GE: 1000M Ethernet l C: Combo interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications Functions 5 Cards The 1GEC provides one GE optical and electrical Combo interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l The Combo interface sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. l The electrical interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. l The optical interface works at 100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. Applications The 1GEC is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 1GEC panel. Figure 5-10 Appearance of the 1GEC panel 1 2 3 4 5 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-21 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel. Table 5-21 Buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel Number in Figure 5-10 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-10 2 and 3 4 and 5 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-22 describes the types and functions of interface on the 1GEC. Name Description Table 5-22 Types and functions of the interface on the 1GEC Lette r in Figur e 5-10 a Qu ant ity 1 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface The 1GEC provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. NOTE Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description Cable Type The 1GEC provides one GE optical interface to transmit and receive GE services. 6.6 Optical Fiber Qu ant ity 1 Name 1000BA SE-X optical interface Lette r in Figur e 5-10 b Interface Attributes Table 5-23 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Description Table 5-24 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-25 describes the technical specifications of the 1GEC. Table 5-25 Technical specifications of the 1GEC Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2.28 W Weight 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card The 2FE is the 2-port 100M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). Functions and Applications Functions The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l Two FE electrical interfaces can be bound to function as an upstream interface at the line rate of 200 Mbit/s. l The two FE interfaces work in 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 2FE can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-11 shows the appearance of the 2FE. Figure 5-11 Appearance of the 2FE 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-26 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-26 Buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel Number in Figure 5-11 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-27 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE. Name Table 5-27 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE Letter Description in Figure 5-11 a Qua ntit y 2 FE electrical interface The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-28 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-29 describes the technical specifications of the 2FE. Table 5-29 Technical specifications of the 2FE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 3.01 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M is the E1/T1/PRI/VE1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1/PRI/VE1 interfaces. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) indicates ISDN primary rate interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE l 1/2: indicates one or two interfaces. l E1: indicates E1 interfaces. l T1: indicates T1 interfaces. l M: indicates multiflex trunks. l VE1: indicates voice E1 interfaces. Table 5-30 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M. Table 5-30 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M Card Name 1E1T1-M 2E1T1-M Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 2E1T1-M cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-31 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-31 Slots of 2E1T1-M SIC and WSIC cards Card 2E1T1-M (SIC) 2E1T1-M (WSIC) Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M provides the following functions:
l Sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. l Provides CE1/T1 access. l Provides the ISDN PRI function. Applications 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M(SIC) can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. 2E1T1-M(WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Panel and Interfaces 5 Cards Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-M. Figure 5-12 Appearance of the 1E1T1-M 1 2 a Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC). Figure 5-13 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC) 1 2 a Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC). Figure 5-14 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC) 1 2 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-32 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-32 Buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel Number in Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, Figure 5-14 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off 2 LINK/ACT Green Yellow (The indicator is in green and blinks red.) Off If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is in green and blinks red, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no connection. Interfaces Table 5-33 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Quantity Nam e Description Table 5-33 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Letter in Cable Type Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, Figure 5-14 a DB9 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables 1E1T1-M: 1 2E1T1-M: 2 75-ohm or 120-
ohm E1 cable or 100-ohm T1 cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-34 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 5-35 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Technical Specifications Table 5-36 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-36 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2E1T1-M (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card) The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is the E1/T1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1 interfaces. NOTE 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F stands for:
l 1/2: one or two interfaces l E1: E1 interface l T1: T1 interface l F: fractional E1 Table 5-37 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F. Table 5-37 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F Card Name 1E1T1-F Quantity of Interfaces 1 2E1T1-F 2 Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. Table 5-38 describes the differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-38 Differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-
M Whether to Support the PRI Mode No Card Name 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Fractional E1 Mode Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can only be bundled into one channel at a rate of n x 64 kbit/s (n specifies the number of bundled timeslots and ranges from 1 to 31). 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can be bundled into multiple channels. Yes Applications The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces The 1E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-F panel. The 2E1T1-F and 2E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-F panel. Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-32 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F panel. Interfaces Table 5-33 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Interface Attributes Table 5-39 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Attribute Cable type Description E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode Unchannelized E1 Function Backup Terminal access Table 5-40 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-41 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card The 1SA/2SA is the 1-port/2-port synchronous/asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE l 1/2: indicates one interface or two interfaces. l S: indicates synchronous serial interface. l A: indicates asynchronous serial interface. Table 5-42 lists the number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA. Table 5-42 Number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 Card Name 1SA 2SA Functions and Applications Functions The 1SA/2SA provides the following functions:
l A synchronous serial interface can function as a DCE or DTE. It supports multiple physical layer protocols, such as V.24, V.35, and X.21, but does not support X.21 DCE. The maximum rate of V.24 is 64 kbit/s and V.35 is 2.048 Mbit/s. l An asynchronous serial interface supports the RS232 protocol and provides a maximum transmission rate of 115.2 kbit/s. l The 1SA/2SA provides system management channels by using in-band GE channels and implements in-service upgrade by using system management channels. l The system powers on or off the 1SA/2SA and monitors the current of the 1SA/2SA; the backplane provides 12 V voltage for the 1SA/2SA. l The 1SA/2SA is hot swappable. Applications 1SA/2SA can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-15 shows the appearance of the 1SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-15 Appearance of the 1SA 1 2 3 a Figure 5-16 shows the appearance of the 2SA. Figure 5-16 Appearance of the 2SA 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-43 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel. Table 5-43 Buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel Numbe r in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Numbe r in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Synchronous/
Asynchronous serial interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the LINK indicator is off, the link is not connected. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the ACT indicator is off, no data is transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-44 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA. Name Quantity Description Table 5-44 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA Lett er in Figu re 5-15 and Figu re 5-16 a DB28 1SA: 1 2SA: 2 The synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable is selected according to attributes of the connected line. Cable Type 6.8 Synchronous/
Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-45 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-46 describes the technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-46 Technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption Weight l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card) The 8AS is an 8-port asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE 8AS stands for:
l 8: eight interfaces l AS: asynchronous serial interface Functions and Applications Functions The 8AS sends, receives, and processes asynchronous data traffic. l Supports a maximum of 115.2 kbit/s transmission rate for each asynchronous serial interface. l Supports terminal access and asynchronous leased lines. l Functions as a dialup access server for small and medium-sized ISPs when asynchronous serial interfaces are used for dialup. Applications The 8AS is installed into the WSIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. On the AR1200, a WSIC slot consists of two SIC slots. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-17 shows the appearance of the 8AS panel. Figure 5-17 Appearance of the 8AS panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-47 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel. 5 Cards Table 5-47 Buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel Number in Figure 5-17 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK
(interface status indicator) 2 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. Interfaces Table 5-48 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS. Name Quant Table 5-48 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS Letter in Figure 5-17 a Description RJ45 ity 8 Interfaces on the 8AS send, receive, and process asynchronous data traffic using customized RJ45 cables. Cable Type 6.12 8AS Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes Table 5-49 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces 5 Cards Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-50 describes the technical specifications of the 8AS. Table 5-50 Technical specifications of the 8AS Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 8.9 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 5.5.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card) The 1BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides one ISDN S/T interface, which transmits data services. The 1BST transmits, receives, and processes 1-channel ISDN BRI S/T data flow. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions The 1BST provides one ISDN S/T interface for data access. The 1BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports TE mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications The 1BST is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the 1BST panel. Figure 5-18 Appearance of the 1BST panel 21 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-51 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel. Table 5-51 Buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel Number in Figure 5-18 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-18 Indicator Color Description Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-52 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST. Table 5-52 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST Name Quantity Description Cable Type RJ45 1 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Letter in Figure 5-18 a Interface Attributes Table 5-53 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Cable Technical Specifications Description l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-54 describes the technical specifications of the 1BST. Table 5-54 Technical specifications of the 1BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card) 1CPOS-155M provides an STM-1/OC3 optical interface to implement 63-channel E1 or 84-
channel T1 transmission in compliance with SDH/SONET. NOTE 1CPOS-155M stands for:
l 1: one interface l C: channelized l POS: Packet Over SDH/SONET l 155M: a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Functions and Applications Functions 1CPOS-155M has the following functions:
l Supports clear channel (unframed) E1, non-channelized (framed) E1, and channelized CE1. l Supports non-channelized (framed) T1 and channelized CT1. l Supports the link layer protocols such as HDLC and PPP and a maximum of 1024 HDLC channels. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Supports four SFP optical module types: short-distance multi-mode (1310 nm), mid-
distance single-mode (1310 nm), long-distance single-mode (1310 nm), and ultra-long-
distance single-mode (1550 nm). l Automatically starts and loads configurations after being powered on, provides the system management function using a GE inband channel, and uses the UART serial interface as the escape channel for subcard. l Uses the 12 V power provided by the backplane, be powered on and off by the main control board, and monitors voltage and current. l Be hot swappable. Applications 1CPOS-155M can be installed in a SIC slot of AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the 1CPOS-155M. Figure 5-19 Appearance of the 1CPOS-155M 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-55 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel. Table 5-55 Buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel Number in Figure 5-19 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-19 Indicator Color Description Off Green LINK ACT Yellow If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-56 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-56 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M Letter in Figure 5-19 a Quantit y 1 Name SFP optical interface Description Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber The 1CPOS-155M provides one SFP optical interface to transmit and receive SDH/
SONET frames. Interface Attributes Table 5-57 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description IP Attribute Network layer protocol Table 5-58 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km Center wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Extinction ratio
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode Technical Specifications Table 5-59 describes the technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-59 Technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card) A 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G antenna interfaces and one mini USB interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions and Applications Functions Applications The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides WAN access through WCDMA. The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-20 shows the appearance of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Figure 5-20 3G-HSPA+7 panel 1 2 3 4 a b a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-60 describes the buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel. 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-60 Buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel Number in Figure 5-20 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Orange Green 3G 2G Green 2 3 If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the 3G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 3G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 3G signals strength is medium. If the indicator is steady on, the 2G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 2G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 2G signals strength is medium. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-20 4 Indicator Color Description WWAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the 3G/2G connection is being established or is active. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received over the 3G/2G connection. If the indicator is off, the 3G/2G connection has not been established or is inactive. Interfaces Table 5-61 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Name Description Table 5-61 Types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card Lette r in Figu re 5-20 a Qu ant ity 2 3G antenna Cable Type Antenna interface The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G interfaces to transmit and receive 3G service data. One interface is the primary interface, and the other is the secondary interface. The mini USB interface is used to commission the 3G module. Mini USB cable 1 Mini USB interface b Interface Attributes Table 5-62 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate Description GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Installing a 3G SIM Card For details on how to installing a 3G SIM card on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card, see the AR1200&2200&3200 Quick Installation Guide. Technical Specifications Table 5-63 describes the technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Table 5-63 Technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 7 W 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card) The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces. 4GEW-T stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l T: electrical interface Functions and Applications Functions The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-T interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE electrical interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation mode. Applications The 4GEW-T interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-T interface card. Figure 5-21 4GEW-T panel 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-64 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-64 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-21 1 STAT Green If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-65 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-65 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-21 a Qu ant ity 4 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface Description Cable Type The 4GEW-T interface card provides four 1000M electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE data traffic. 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interface Attributes Table 5-66 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-67 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-67 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-T Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 11 W 0.3 kg 5.5.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces. 4GEW-S stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l S: optical interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-S interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE optical interfaces work in 100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. The 4GEW-S interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-S interface card. Figure 5-22 4GEW-S panel 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-68 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-68 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel Number in Figure 5-22 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Off Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-69 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card. Name Description Table 5-69 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-22 a Qu ant ity 4 The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to transmit and receive GE service traffic. 1000BA SE-X optical interface Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-70 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 5-71 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-72 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-S interface card. Table 5-72 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-S Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 8 W 0.3 kg 5.6 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.6.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card) The 2BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides two ISDN S/T interfaces, which transmit voice service. The 2BST implements the ISDN BRI function and provides the bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel:
l B channel: provides 64 kbit/s bandwidth and transmits voice service. l D channel: is a signaling channel and provides 16 kbit/s bandwidth. l The total bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel is 144 kbit/s. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards The S/T interface on the 2BST provides a rate of 192 kbit/s, including 144 kbit/s for data transmission and 48 kbit/s for maintenance information transmission. Table 5-73 lists the number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST. Table 5-73 Number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST User Interface One S/T interface Two S/T interfaces Usage Scenario Data services Mode TE Feed Supported No Voice services NT
-40 V feed Card Name 1BST 2BST NOTE l TE: terminal equipment l NT: network termination 2BST cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-74 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-74 Slots of 2BST SIC and WSIC cards Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Card 2BST (SIC) 2BST (WSIC) Functions and Applications Functions The 2BST has the following functions:
l Provides two ISDN S/T interfaces for voice access. l Implements NT mode. The 2BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the line -40 V feed, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports NT mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications 2BST (SIC) is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. The 2BST (WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-23 shows the appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel. Figure 5-23 Appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the 2BST (WSIC). Figure 5-24 Appearance of the 2BST (WSIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-75 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-75 Buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel Number in Figure 5-23, Figure 5-24 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green 2 3 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. Interfaces Table 5-76 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST. Name Quantity Description Table 5-76 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST Letter in Figure 5-23, Figure 5-24 a RJ45 2 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. Cable Type 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-77 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable Technical Specifications 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-78 describes the technical specifications of the 2BST. Table 5-78 Technical specifications of the 2BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 2BST (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2BST (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 16.8 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.6.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card The 4FXS1FXO is the voice module on the AR routers. It provides five RJ11 interfaces, including four POTS FXS interfaces and one POTS FXO interface. NOTE l An FXS interface is a simulated subscriber line interface and provides access to AT0 loop trunk of the analog phone, fax, and telephone exchange. l An FXO interface is a loop trunk interface and provides access to the telephone exchange by using regular subscriber lines. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4FXS1FXO works with the SRU to implement the voice call function. The first FXS interface works with an FXO interface to implement the power failure survival function. The 4FXS1FXO can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-25 shows the appearance of the 4FXS1FXO. Figure 5-25 Appearance of the 4FXS1FXO a 1 2 3 Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-79 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel. Table 5-79 Buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel Number in Figure 5-25 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the FXO channel is being occupied by a call. 2 ACT (interface status indicator) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-25 Indicator Color Description ACT (interface status indicator) Green If the indicator is off, the FXO channel is idle. If the indicator is steady on, the FXS channel is being occupied by a call. If the indicator is off, the FXS channel is idle. 3 Interfaces Table 5-80 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-80 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO Letter in Figure 5-25 a Name Qua ntity Description Cable Type FXS (RJ11) FXO (RJ11) 4 1 The POTS voice FXS interface uses regular telephone lines. The POTS voice FXO interface uses regular telephone lines. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Interface Attributes Table 5-81 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Technical Specifications Table 5-82 describes the technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-82 Technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.78 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.6.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is a VoIP voice processing DIMM. Functions and Applications Functions The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module provides the voice over IP (VoIP) functions, including:
l Processes the dial tone. l Parses telephone numbers. l Generates interactive voice response (IVR) and voice signal. l Encodes, decodes, and converts voice. l Implements voice conferences and echo canceler (EC). l Processes IP packets. Applications The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is installed into the DSP DIMM of the main control board on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. CAUTION Only the DSP module supported by the product can be inserted into the DSP DIMM slot. The DDR3 memory board or unsupported DIMMs cannot be inserted; otherwise, the device may be damaged or does not function properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 5 Cards Table 5-83 shows the technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module. Table 5-83 Technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module Item Maximum power consumption Specification 2.89 W Weight 0.05 kg (0.11 lb) 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. 5.7.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B are the ADSL2/ADSL2+ service access modules on the AR routers and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. NOTE l The ADSL-A/M supports both Annex A and Annex M. l The ADSL-B supports Annex B. Table 5-84 describes the comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M. Table 5-84 Comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M Card Name Annex A Usage Scenario Annex A is applied to ADSL over POTS and compatible with POTS services. Annex B Annex B is applied to ADSL over ISDN and compatible with ISDN services. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Card Name Annex M Usage Scenario Annex M expands the upstream frequency band of ADSL and provides a higher upstream transmission rate. G.992.3 and G.992.5 each define Annex M:
l Annex M defined in G.992.3 and Annex M defined in G.992.5 have the same upstream frequency band. l They have different downstream frequency bands:
The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.3 is 1104 kHz. The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.5 is 2208 kHz. Functions and Applications Functions The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B each provide 1-channel ADSL/ADSL2+ access, provide independent CPU and management interfaces, and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. The ADSL-A/M or ADSL-B consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l ADSL2+ module: implements ADSL2+ modulation and demodulation on CPEs. l SGMII upstream module: provides one SGMII upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides two types of working clocks for cards. Applications The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces NOTE The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-26 Appearance of the ADSL-A/M 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-85 describes the buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel. Table 5-85 Buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-26 1 STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the DSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the DSL channel is not activated. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the DSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-86 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M. Table 5-86 Types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M Letter in Figure 5-26 a Name ADSL2+
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The ADSL-A/M provides one RJ11 interface, which supports regular telephone lines. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-87 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Technical Specifications Table 5-88 describes the technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B. Table 5-88 Technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 5.4 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.7.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card The 4G.SHDSL is the G.SHDSL service access module on the AR routers. G.Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (G.SHDSL) uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TCPAM), provides up to 5.696 Mbit/s symmetric data rates, and supports 2/3/4-pair binding. The transmission rate can automatically adapt according to the line length and conditions. G.SHDSL provides a longer transmission distance than ADSL. Functions and Applications Functions The 4G.SHDSL provides 4-channel G.SHDSL access and the independent CPU as well as management interfaces. The 4G.SHDSL consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l G.SHDSL module: processes G.SHDSL services on CPEs. l GE upstream module: provides one upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides three types of working clocks for cards. Applications The 4G.SHDSL can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-27 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL. Figure 5-27 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-89 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-89 Buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel Number in Figure 5-27 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 LINK Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the four DSL channels have been activated. If the indicator is off, the four DSL channels have not been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.25 seconds and blinks three times in the next 0.75 seconds, the DSL channel has been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.5 seconds and blinks twice in the next 0.5 seconds, the two DSL channels have been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.75 seconds and blinks in the next 0.25 seconds, the three DSL channels have been activated. ACT Yellow If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 3 Interfaces Table 5-90 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Name Table 5-90 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL Letter in Figure 5-27 a Description Qua ntity 1 Cable Type G.SHDSL
(RJ45) 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables or 6.5 Network Cable The 4G.SHDSL provides one RJ45 interface, which supports standard network cables. Interface Attributes Table 5-91 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end Standards compliance G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair Technical Specifications Table 5-92 describes the technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL. Table 5-92 Technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 8.2 W Weight 0.35 kg (0.78 lb) 5.7.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card) The 1PON card is the EPON/GPON auto-sensing module on the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE 1 port: There are two ports on the 1PON card, one of which is the backup port. Therefore, the 1PON card is also called the 1PON. The 1PON card functions as the ONU of the EPON/GPON system:
l Receives cells broadcast in TDM mode at a downlink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 2.488 Gbit/s (GPON). l Supports burst transmission in TDMA mode at an uplink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 1.244 Gbit/s (GPON). Functions and Applications Functions The 1PON card works with the main control board and supports two PON SFP uplink interfaces. The 1PON card has the following functions:
l Supports OLT clock synchronization but not the 1588 function. l Supports EPON/GPON but not GE. l Supports the DyingGasp function. l Supports rogue ONT detection and isolation. l Detects the receiving optical power. l Supports delayed reset. Applications The 1PON card is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-28 shows the appearance of the 1PON panel. Figure 5-28 Appearance of the 1PON panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-93 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-93 Buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel Number in Figure 5-28 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 and 3 PON interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator indicates whether the PON card is requesting data transmission. l The AUTH indicator indicates the authentication status. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are steady on, the 1PON card is registered successfully. If the LINK indicator is steady on and the AUTH indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card is being registered. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator blink once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card keeps requesting data transmission. When this occurs, the 1PON card is a rogue ONU. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are off, the 1PON card does not request data transmission. Interfaces Table 5-94 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card. Table 5-94 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card Letter in Figure 5-28 a Qua ntity 2 Description Name PON interface The 1PON card provides EPON/GPON interfaces that are connected using SC/PC fibers. Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-95 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Receivin g end Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Input wavelength range 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C Technical Specifications Table 5-96 describes the technical specifications of the 1PON card. Table 5-96 Technical specifications of the 1PON card Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm 8.72 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Weight Specification 0.3 kg 5.7.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card) The VDSL interface card provides an interface for VDSL2 access. Functions and Applications Functions The VDSL interface card is used for packet switching and device management. It supports the following functions:
l Works in VDSL2 mode that complies with ITU-T G.993.2 and supports profile 17a defined in G.993.2. l Rolls back to ADSL2+ mode that complies with G.992.5. l Supports temperature and power measurement. l Sends a dying gasp alarm in the case of a power failure. The VDSL interface card consists of the following modules:
l ADSL2/VDSL2 socket: implements ADSL2/VDSL2 modulation and demodulation on customer premises equipment (CPE). l Storage module: stores data and programs on the interface card. l GE uplink interface module: provides a GE uplink interface to receive and transmit data. The SRU manages the interface through this GE interface. l Temperature and power module: measures temperature and power on the interface card. l Clock resetting module: provides signals to reset the system clock. Applications The VDSL interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-29 shows the appearance of the VDSL interface card. Figure 5-29 VDSL panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-97 describes the buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel. 5 Cards Table 5-97 Buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel Number in Figure 5-29 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s
(0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the VDSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the VDSL channel has not been activated. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the VDSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-98 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-98 Types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card Letter in Figure 5-29 a Name VDSL2
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The VDSL interface card provides an RJ11 interface, which connects to a DSLAM through a telephone cable. Interface Attributes Table 5-99 VDSL interface attributes Item Connector Standards compliance Rate Description RJ11 VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Technical Specifications Table 5-100 describes the technical specifications of the VDSL interface card. Table 5-100 Technical specifications of the VDSL interface card Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Parameter Maximum power consumption Description 7.6 W Weight 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6 Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the cables used by the AR routers, including the structures and technical specifications of the cables. 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. 6.2 DC Power Cables A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. 6.6 Optical Fiber An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. 6.13 3G Antenna A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. Application Appearance An AC power cable connects the following:
l The AC input power jack on the chassis l The other end is connected to the AC power supply Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the AC power cable. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the AC power cable Specifications NOTE The AC power cables used in different countries and regions may have different specifications. The following are the specifications of the international standard AC power cable. Table 6-1 lists the specifications of the AC power cable. Table 6-1 Specifications of the AC power cable Item Cable type Function Description External power cable 250 V AC/10 A complying with international standard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable type Description PI-straight-male C13-straight-female l 227 IEC 53 (RVV)-300 V/500 V l Rated voltage: 300 V/500 V l Standards compliance: 227 IEC 53 (RVV) Conductor cross-sectional area 3 x 1.0 mm2 (3 x 0.00155 in.2) Fireproof level GB18380.1 6.2 DC Power Cables Applications A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. A DC power cable connects the following two interfaces:
l Input power jack on the chassis l Output power interface on an external power system NOTE A black -48 V DC power return wire (RTN) is connected to the RTN(+) end of the DC power supply. A blue -48 V DC power cable is connected to the NEG(-) end of the DC power supply. Appearance and Structure The black -48 V DC power return wire and the blue -48 V DC power cable are shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 6-2 -48 V DC power return wire 6 Cables Figure 6-3 -48 V DC power cable Specifications The technical specifications of a -48 V DC power return wire and a -48 V DC power cable are the same, as described in Table 6-2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-2 Specifications of the DC power cables Item Cable type Color Connector 1 Connector 2 Impedance Description Power cable Blue for -48 V DC power cable and black for -48 V DC power return wire OT Cord end terminal 4.95 /km Conductor cross-sectional area 1.2 mm2 (0.00186 in.2) 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. Application Appearance A ground cable connects the chassis to the ground. Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the ground cable. Figure 6-4 Appearance of the ground cable Specifications Table 6-3 lists the specifications of the ground cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-3 Specifications of the ground cable Item Cable type Color Description Power cable Green-yellow Connector type (X1/X2) OT/OT naked crimping terminal Gauge Cable type Maximum current Fireproof level 10 AWG (cross-sectional area 5.2 mm2
[0.0081 in.2]) l Standards compliance: H07Z-K UL3386 l Length: 0.3 m 50.0 A VW-1, CSA FT1 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. Application A console cable connects the console port of the device to the serial port of an operation terminal to transmit configuration data. A shielded cable or an unshielded cable can be used according to the onsite situation. A console cable connects the device and terminal as follows:
l The 8-pin RJ45 connector is inserted into the console port of the device. l The DB9 male connector is connected to an operation terminal, which is usually a PC. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-5 shows the structure of the console cable. Figure 6-5 Structure of the console cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.9 Pos.5 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.6 Pos.1 X1 X2 1 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-4 describes the pin assignments of the console cable. Table 6-4 Pin assignments of the console cable Connector Pin assignment X1(DB9) 2 3 5 X2(RJ45) 3 6 5 Specifications Table 6-5 lists the specifications of the console cable. Table 6-5 Specifications of the console cable Item Connector type Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Length Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-
pin, 8-bit, male Twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U 0.32 mm (0.13 in.) 28 AWG (cross-sectional area 0.08 mm2 [0.0002 in. 2]) 2 pairs 3 m (9.85 ft.) 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. Application A network cable connects a maintenance terminal to the console port on the main control board for local or remote maintenance. The network cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-6 describes the pin assignments of the straight-through cable. Table 6-6 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-7 describes the pin assignments of the crossover cable. Table 6-7 Pin assignments of the crossover cable Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 3 6 1 4 5 2 7 8 X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOTE To achieve the optimum electrical transmission performance, ensure that the wires connected to pins 1 and 2 and to pins 3 and 6 are twisted pairs. Specifications Table 6-8 lists the specifications of the network cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-8 Specifications of the network cable Item Connector type (X1/X2) Description RJ45 connectors Cable type Color Characteristic impedance Diameter Breakdown voltage Impedance Pin Frequency Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs
(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP) Dark gray 100.0 0.510 mm (0.02 in.) 500.0 V 93.8 8 pins 0 MHz to 100 MHz Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz Fireproof level Length CM l Straight through cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.), 10 meters
(32.8 ft.), 20 meters (65.6 ft.), and 30 meters (98.5 ft.) l Crossover cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.) and 30 meters
(98.5 ft.) 6.6 Optical Fiber Application An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. An optical fiber carries optical signals and transmits them over short distance. An optical fiber connects the following:
l The optical interface on a board l The optical distribution frame (ODF) or the optical interface on another device Table 6-9 lists the classification of optical fibers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-9 Optical fiber classification No. Purpose Local End Connector LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to the ODF To connect LPUs of two devices LC/PC Remote End Connector FC/PC LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to another device LC/PC SC/PC or LC/
PC 1 2 3 Mode Single mode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Appearance The appearances of the single-mode optical fiber and the multimode optical fiber are the same, but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is orange. CAUTION When connecting or removing the LC/PC optical connector, align the connector with the optical interface, and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following points:
l Align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and insert the optical fiber into the interface gently. l To remove the fiber, press the latch on the connector and pull the fiber out. Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearances of the single mode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-8 Single mode fiber with LC/PC connectors Figure 6-9 Single mode fiber with SC/PC connectors Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the multimode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-10 Multimode fiber with LC/PC connectors Pin Assignments Table 6-10 describes the pin assignments of the optical fiber. Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the optical fiber Local End Terminal Signal Direction
->
Remote End Terminal Optical interface Rx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Rx terminal
<-
Fiber Selection Criterion Table 6-11 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 6-12 lists common optical connectors. Table 6-11 Fiber selection criterion Parameter Length Criterion Onsite survey result Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Parameter Single mode or multimode Criterion Optical module type l The optical transmitting module of the multitransverse mode is connected to the multimode fiber. l The optical transmitting module of the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode is connected to the single mode fiber. NOTE If the optical fiber jumper is used, the connector connected to the device must be the LC/PC connector, and the connector connected to the remote end must be of the same type as the remote end interface. Connector shape l Cube: SC/PC, LC/PC, and MTRJ/PC l Column: ST/PC and FC/PC Table 6-12 Common optical connectors SC/PC optical connector LC/PC optical connector FC/PC optical connector MTRJ/PC optical connector
-
ST/PC optical connector 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Introduction E1 trunk cables are classified into 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cables and 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cables. The connectors of the cables are as follows:
l 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (DB9 to BNC):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides two BNC connectors. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable (DB9 to RJ45):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides an RJ45 connector. A T1 trunk cable is a 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Its appearance is the same as the appearance of an E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-11 shows the appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-11 Appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-12 Appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-13 shows the structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-13 Structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Label 1 Pos.6 Pos.1 Main Label BNC connector Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 X2 X3 Label 2 BNC connector Figure 6-14 shows the structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-14 Structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.6 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) X2 1 8 Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 Pin Assignments Table 6-13 describes the pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Table 6-13 Pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 BNC Connector X2 2 6 7 X3 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-14 describes the pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 X2 (RJ45) 4 2 6 7 5 1 2 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Blue Blue E1/T1 Trunk Cable Extension NOTE The E1/T1 trunk cable is 3 m long. If the connection distance is long, a cable extension is required. l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: BNC to BNC (The two connectors are BNC 75 angle male-II.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: RJ45 to RJ45 (The two connectors are RJ45.) The E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1 trunk cable extension is not used, the BNC connector is connected to the remote device. l If the E1 trunk cable extension is used, the BNC connector is connected to a coaxial connector, and the coaxial connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-15. CAUTION The Tx end of the E1 trunk cable is connected to the Rx end of the remote device, and the Rx end is connected to the Tx end. Figure 6-15 E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r BNC BNC DDN E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Coaxial connector E1 75-ohm cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables The E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is not used, the RJ45 connector is connected to the RJ45 interface of the remote device. l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is used, the RJ45 connector is connected to a network interface connector, and the network interface connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r RJ45 RJ45 DDN E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair Network interface connector Specifications E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm cable extension Table 6-15 lists the specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Table 6-15 Specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 75 ohm l E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 120 ohm l T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 100 ohm l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: coaxial cable l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: balanced twisted pair cable l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: PANTONE WARM GREY 1U l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: PANTONE 430U l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 0.254 mm
(0.01 in.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Cores Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 30 AWG l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 26 AWG l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable:
SYFVZP-75-1-1*4 l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: SEYVP-120 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. Introduction A synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable is connected as follows:
l The DB28 connector is connected to the DB28 port on a card. l Another end depends on the connected device:
If the wide area network (WAN) uses the DDN line, the cable is connected to the CSU/
DSU. If the WAN uses the dial-up line, the cable is connected to the modem. Cable Category CAUTION Verify that devices are connected using appropriate synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Appropriate cable type is determined based on device connection mode (such as synchronous/asynchronous and DTE/DCE modes), signals used by the connected device, baud rate, and clock. Table 6-16 lists the categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Table 6-16 Categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables Cable V.24 DTE cable V.24 DCE cable V.35 DTE cable Local End Connector DB28 connector Network-side Connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector DB28 (male) connector Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Cable V.35 DCE cable X.21 DTE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Local End Connector Network-side Connector DB28 (female) connector DB15 (male) connector DB28 (male) connector DB28 (female) connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector Appearance Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the V.24 DTE cable. Figure 6-17 Appearance of the V.24 DTE cable Figure 6-18 shows the appearance of the V.24 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-18 Appearance of the V.24 DCE cable Figure 6-19 shows the appearance of the V.35 DTE cable. Figure 6-19 Appearance of the V.35 DTE cable Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the V.35 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-20 Appearance of the V.35 DCE cable Figure 6-21 shows the appearance of the X.21 DTE cable. Figure 6-21 Appearance of the X.21 DTE cable Figure 6-22 shows the appearance of the RS449 DTE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-22 Appearance of the RS449 DTE cable Figure 6-23 shows the appearance of the RS449 DCE cable. Figure 6-23 Appearance of the RS449 DCE cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-24 shows the appearance of the RS530 DTE cable. Figure 6-24 Appearance of the RS530 DTE cable Figure 6-25 shows the appearance of the RS530 DCE cable. Figure 6-25 Appearance of the RS530 DCE cable Specifications Table 6-17 lists the specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-17 Specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable Item Characteristic impedance Description 100 ohm Cable type Transmission rate Color Diameter Gauge Pin Twisted pair l V.24: 1200 bit/s to 64 kbit/s l V.35/X.21/RS449/RS530: 1200 bit/s to 2.048 Mbit/
s Dark blue (PANTONE 296U) l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, and X. 21 DTE cable: 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
0.32 mm (0.013 in.) 28 AWG l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, X.21 DTE cable: 5 pairs + 8 pins l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
26 pins 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Introduction The connectors of a 4G.SHDSL cable are as follows:
l Four RJ11 connectors on the local end l An RJ45 connector on the network side Appearance and Structure Figure 6-26 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-26 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable Figure 6-27 shows the structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Figure 6-27 Structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Main Label 1 8 X1 Pin Assignments 6-pin connector Label 1 6 1 X2 Label 2 X3 Label 3 X4 Label 4 X5 Table 6-18 describes the pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-18 Pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (RJ45) 1 (LINE1 A) X2/X3/X4/X5 (RJ11) Tip Color 2.3 White and orange 2 (LINE1 B) 3 (LINE2 A) 6 (LINE2 B) 4 (LINE0 A) 5 (LINE0 B) 7 (LINE3 A) 8 (LINE3 B) 2.4 3.3 3.4 4.3 4.4 5.3 5.4 Orange White and Green Green White and Blue Blue White and brown Brown Specifications NOTE As shown in Table 6-18, the 4G.SHDSL cable uses standard pin assignments. A cable has four ports, each of them has two lines (A/B). The two lines in a port can be assigned in any sequence, but the line pairs must be assigned in certain sequence. Table 6-19 lists the specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Table 6-19 Specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable Item Description 100 ohm Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) 24 AWG 8 pins 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. Introduction ISDN-ST cables are classified into the following types:
Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-29 Appearance of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Figure 6-30 shows the structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Figure 6-30 Structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) X1 1 8 Pin Assignments 1 8 X2 Table 6-20 describes the pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable. Pins 3 and 6 are the sending end, and pins 4 and 5 are the receiving end. Table 6-20 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable RJ45 1 Signal
-
RJ45 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-21 describes the pin assignments of the ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Pins 4 and 5 are the sending end, and pins 3 and 6 are the receiving end. Table 6-21 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface crossover cable RJ45 (TE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 (NT) 1 2 4 3 6 5 7 8 Technical Specifications Table 6-22 lists the technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable. Table 6-22 Technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable Item Characteristic impedance Specification 100 ohm Cable Color Diameter Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Impedance Pin Specification 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 pins 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. Introduction Appearance The regular telephone line is connected as follows:
l The RJ11 connector is connected to a device such as a phone and fax machine. l Another RJ11 connector is connected to the voice card of the AR1200. Figure 6-31 shows the appearance of the regular telephone line. Figure 6-31 Appearance of the regular telephone line 6PIN-RJ11 6PIN-RJ11 1 6 X1 Pin Assignment 6 1 X2 Table 6-23 provides the pin assignment of a regular telephone line. Table 6-23 Pin assignment of a regular telephone line X1 Pin 3 4 Wire Color Red Green X2 Pin 3 4 Remarks Tip(+) Ring(-) Specifications Table 6-24 lists the specifications of the regular telephone line. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-24 Specifications of the regular telephone line Item Dielectric strength Description 150 V Maximum current Impedance Cable type Color Gauge Pin 1 A 237.25 ohm UL20251 White 28 AWG 2 pins 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. Introduction An 8AS cable connects the console port on an 8AS interface card to the serial port of an operation terminal. You can use shield cables or unshielded cables as required in different scenarios. The common usage scenarios of 8AS cables are:
l To connect an 8AS interface card to automatic teller machines in a bank, use shield straight-
through cables. You can buy shield straight-through cables from Huawei or made these cables onsite. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a dumb terminal, use a transit cable and a shield straight-through cable. A transit cable has an RJ45 plug on one end and an RJ45 socket on the other end. The transit cable converts the pin assignments on the dumb terminal to the standard pin assignments, which are the same as those on the straight-through cable. Then the straight-through cable can connect to the dumb terminal. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a serial port device, such as a PC or modem, use an asynchronous serial cable and a transit cable. One end of an asynchronous serial cable is an RJ45 socket, and the other end has a DB25 plug and a DB9 plug. The asynchronous serial cable connects to the PC or modem through the transit cable. NOTE Huawei can customize 8AS cables of specified length. Straight-through cable Figure 6-32 shows the appearance of a straight-through cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 Pin (8AS) 5 6 7 8 X2 Pin (Console) 3 6 1 8 Table 6-8 lists the technical specifications of a straight-through cable. Transit Cable Figure 6-34 shows the appearance of a transit cable. Figure 6-34 Transit cable appearance Figure 6-35 shows the structure of a transit cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-35 Transit cable structure Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) 1 8 X2 X1 1 8 Table 6-26 lists the pin assignments of a transit cable. Table 6-26 Pin assignments of a transit cable X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X2 4 2 7 5 6 3 8 1 Table 6-27 lists the specifications of a transit cable. Table 6-27 Specifications of a transit cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Description 100 ohm Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U Core diameter of the inner conductor Wire gauge of the inner conductor DC resistance of the inner conductor Number of pins 0.51 mm 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Asynchronous Serial Cable 6 Cables Figure 6-36 shows the appearance of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-36 Appearance of an asynchronous serial cable Figure 6-37 shows the structure of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-37 Structure of an asynchronous serial cable D-type connector
(25-pin, male) Pos.14 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.25 Pos.13 X1 X2 1 8 Pos.6 Pos.1 Pos.5 X3 Pos.9 D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Table 6-28 lists the pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-28 Pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable X1 4 X2 1 X3 7 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 20 2 8 7 3 6 5 X2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X3 4 3 1 5 2 6 8 Table 6-29 lists the specifications an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-29 Specifications of an asynchronous serial cable Item Connector Cable type Color Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 25-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-pin, 8-bit l Connector X3: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male Symmetrical twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.32 mm Wire gauge of the inner conductor 28 AWG (cross-sectional area approximately equal to 0.08 mm2) Number of pins Length 6.13 3G Antenna 2 pairs 3 m A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Introduction The antenna interfaces on a 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can connect to whip antennas and indoor remote antennas. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l Whip antennas are directly installed on an AR router and are recommended when a router is desk installed or wall mounted. l Indoor remote antennas have a 3 m long feed line and can use two 6 m feed lines to expand the length to 15 m. Indoor remote antennas are recommended when an AR router is installed in a cabinet or rack. (Indoor remote antennas need to be ordered separately if needed.) Whip Antenna Figure 6-38 shows the appearance of a whip antenna. Figure 6-38 Whip antenna Table 6-30 lists the technical specifications of a whip antenna. Table 6-30 Technical specifications of a whip antenna Item Connector Color Characteristic impedance Length Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Description SMA-J Black 50 ohm 150 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 10 W
-40C to +70C Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Relative humidity Gain Description 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1d Bi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 3 Remote Antenna Figure 6-39 shows the appearance of a remote antenna. Figure 6-39 Remote antenna Table 6-31 lists the technical specifications of a remote antenna. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-31 Technical specifications of a remote antenna Item Connector Description SMA-Male Color Characteristic impedance Height Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Gain Black 50 ohm 260 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 50 W
-40C to +90C l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1 dBi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2.5 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 2.5 Attenuation
< 0.3 dB on each meter of feed line (within the working frequency band) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7 List of Indicators About This Chapter This chapter describes the status and meanings of indicators on the AR routers, including indicators on the front and rear panels, cards, fan modules, and power supply units. 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200 panel. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220 panel. 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2240 panel. 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR3260 panel. 7.5 Fan Module Indicators This section describes the fan module indicators. 7.6 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. 7.7 SRU Indicators This section describes the SRU indicators. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200 panel. NOTE l The AR1220V and AR1220 have the same indicators. l The AR1220VW and AR1220W have the same indicators on the front panels. Compared with the AR1220V and AR1220, they have a WLAN indicator and switch button. l The AR1220, AR1220V, AR1220W, and AR1220VW have the same indicators on the rear panels. The AR1220VW is used as an example to describe the indicators. Figure 7-1 shows the indicators on the AR1220VW front panel. Figure 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220VW front panel 3 4 1 2 5 6 Table 7-1 describes the indicators on the AR1220VW front panel. Table 7-1 Description of indicators on the AR1220VW front panel Number in Figure 7-1 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 2 WAN Green 3 ACT Red and green 5 WLAN Green If the indicator is steady on, at least one GE interface has been connected or activated. If the indicator is off, neither GE interface is connected or activated. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. If the indicator is steady on, the link has been connected or activated. If the indicator blinks (20 Hz), the link is transmitting data. If the traffic volume of transmitted data increases, the indicator blinks faster. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected or activated. 4 6 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. WLAN The button enables and disables the WLAN function. Figure 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-2 Indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel 7 8 9 10 Table 7-2 describes the indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel. Table 7-2 Description of indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel Number in Figure 7-2 7 Indicator Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number in Figure 7-2 9 and 10 Indicator Color Description Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220 panel. Figure 7-3 shows the indicators on the AR2220 front panel. Figure 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220 front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Table 7-3 describes the indicators on the AR2220 front panel. Table 7-3 Description of indicators on the AR2220 front panel Number in Figure 7-3 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 MiniSD card indicator Green Green Yellow Green Yellow SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. 7 ACT Red and green If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no MiniSD card. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. 9 Green EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. RST 10 CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2240 panel. There is no independent indicator on the AR2240 panel. Indicators on the AR2240 panel are indicators of modules inserted in slots. l Indicators on the AR2240 front panel:
7.6 Power Indicators 7.7 SRU Indicators l Indicators on the AR2240 rear panel:
Indicators of service subcards 7.5 Fan Module Indicators Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR3260 panel. There is no independent indicator on the AR3260 panel. Indicators on the AR3260 panel are indicators of modules inserted in slots. l Indicators on the AR3260 front panel:
7.6 Power Indicators 7.7 SRU Indicators l Indicators on the AR3260 rear panel:
Service subcard indicators 7.5 Fan Module Indicators 7.5 Fan Module Indicators This section describes the fan module indicators. Figure 7-4 shows the fan module indicator of the AR2240. Figure 7-4 Fan module indicator of the AR2240 Indicator Figure 7-5 shows the fan module indicator of the AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-5 Fan module indicator of the AR3260 Indicator Table 7-4 describes the fan module indicator of the AR2240 and AR3260. Table 7-4 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. 7.6 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. HW-100-48AC14D Figure 7-6 shows the indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-6 Indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D Indicator Table 7-5 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is Power indicator in the normal range. Color Blue If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. 150 W DC Power Supply Unit Figure 7-7 shows the indicator of the 150 W DC power supply unit. Figure 7-7 Indicator of the 150 W DC power supply unit Indicator Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Table 7-6 Description of 150 W DC power indicators Name STATU S Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit occurs. PWR350D Figure 7-8 shows the indicator of the PWR350D. Figure 7-8 Indicator of the PWR350D Indicator Table 7-7 Description of the PWR350D indicators Name STATUS Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit occurs. PWR150A Figure 7-9 shows the indicator of the PWR150A. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-9 Indicator of the PWR150A Indicator Table 7-8 Description of the PWR150A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the power supply unit functions properly. If the indicator blinks, the output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short-circuit. If the indicator is off, the input power is out of range, for example no AC input, overvoltage, and undervoltage, or the output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage and overtemperature. PWR350A Figure 7-10 shows the indicators of the PWR350A. Figure 7-10 Indicator of the PWR350A Indicator Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Table 7-9 Description of the PWR350A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Red and green Description If the indicator is steady green, the input power is in the normal range. If the indicator blinks alternately between red and green, the output power is out of range, for example, when an overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit event occurs. In these events, the power supply unit goes into hiccup protection mode. 7.7 SRU Indicators This section describes the SRU indicators. NOTE The SRU40 and SRU80 panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the SRU40. Figure 7-11 shows the SRU indicators. Figure 7-11 SRU indicators 1 2 3 4 56 56 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 Table 7-10 Buttons and indicators on the SRU panel Number 1 Indicator SYS Color Green Red Off Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number 2 Indicator ACT (active/
standby status indicator) Color Green 3 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 Micro SD Green ACT (USB) Red and green SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Green Yellow Green Yellow Description If the indicator is green, the SRU is in active state. If the indicator is off, the SRU is in standby state. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no micro SD card. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Description If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. Number Indicator Color 9 10 MiniUSB EN Green CON/AUX EN NOTE Green l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 11 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting cards manually. Resetting a card will cause service interruption; therefore, carefully verify the issue before you reset a card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8 List of Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the types and technical specifications of cards on the AR routers. 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 8-1 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C 00 ARV200R001C 01&ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R002C 01 SIC WSIC XSIC voice card AR1220 AR1220 V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Model&Version SIC AR3260 WSIC XSIC voice card Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 8-2 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001 C00 AR1220 SRU AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001 C01&ARV20 0R002C00 ARV200R002 C01 WLAN Subcard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 8-3 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 0 8FE1GE AR1220 24GE AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00 ARV200R002C0 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 8-4 Matching between WAN cards and software versions 8 Model&
A Version S 1S A 2S A 2F E 1 G E C 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 B S T 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR V20 0R0 01C 01 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W AR V20 0R0 02C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 02C 01 A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R1 22 0L A R2 22 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 8-5 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200 R001C00 ARV200 R001C01 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module ARV200 R002C00 ARV200 R002C01 AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR122 0L AR222 0 AR224 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR326 0 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 8-6 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR1220 V AR1220 AR2220 AR V20 0R0 01C 01 AR V20 0R0 02C 00 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Model&Versio n ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Table 8-7 describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. The table describes the power consumption of the cards operating at 25C (80F). Table 8-7 Power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR1200 Card Name 8FE1GE 1GEC 2FE 1E1T1-M/
2E1T1-M 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-
F 1SA/2SA Maximum Power Consumption 12.036 W 2.28 W 3.01 W 7 W 7 W l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 8AS 8.9 W 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Card Name 1BST 2BST 4FXS1FXO ADSL-A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL Maximum Power Consumption 12 W 16.8 W 12.78 W 5.4 W 8.2 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.35 kg (0.77 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9 List of Interface Attributes About This Chapter This section describes the interface attributes supported by the AR routers. 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 describes the attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 9-2 describes the attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces. Table 9-2 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. A GE optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-3 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 9-4 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Description
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Table 9-5 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Receivin g end Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Input wavelength range Description 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. A CPOS optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-6 and Table 9-7 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-6 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Network layer protocol IP Table 9-7 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Center wavelength Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Extinction ratio Description
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 describes the attributes of channelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-9 describes the attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-9 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Working mode Function Description Unchannelized E1 Backup Terminal access 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 describes the attributes of channelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-11 describes the attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-11 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-13 describes the attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-13 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 lists ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 9-15 describes the attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-15 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-16 describes the attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces on the 32FXS/16FXS. Table 9-16 Attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB68 Standards compliance IEEE 1284C Interface as a 36 contact connector Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Twisted pair DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-17 describes the attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXO. Table 9-17 Attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Telephone cable DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Bandwidth Description 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. Table 9-18 describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces. Table 9-18 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Table 9-19 describes the attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-19 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 lists the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Data equipment type Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 9-21 lists the attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface. Table 9-21 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Item Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode Description MiniUSB-B, angle USB1.0 Device 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. Table 9-22 lists the attributes of the USB-A interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-22 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 lists the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 lists attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 VDSL interface attributes Item Description RJ11 Connector Standards compliance Rate VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2012-06-07 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2011-10-26 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2012-06-07
|
||||
1 2 |
2011-10-26
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007419963
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Administration Building, Headquarters of Huawei
|
||||
1 2 |
Shenzhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@telefication.com
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@emcc.de
|
|||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
QIS
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
AR1220WIFI
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
Z**** X********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Neutron Engineering, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
C******** W******
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
China
|
||||
1 2 |
c******@btl.org.cn
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | No | |||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 09/06/2012 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Access Router | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power listed is the maximum combined conducted output power. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. This device has a 20 MHz and 40 MHz bandwidth mode Permissive change for addition of 3G module in host (FCC ID QISEM820W) | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is the maximum combined conducted output power. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
BTL Inc.
|
||||
1 2 |
Huawei Technologies Co., LTD
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
D****** D********
|
||||
1 2 |
Z******** F********
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
86769******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 |
86-75********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+8676********
|
||||
1 2 |
86-75********
|
|||||
1 2 |
d******@newbtl.org.cn
|
|||||
1 2 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.8240000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.8240000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC